MX3112 System Manual

MX3112 System ManualDocument Number: 61189901L1-1BOctober 2007

NETNET

ETHERNET

MX3RMM

®

MX3112 System Manual

Front Matter

TrademarksAny brand names and product names included in this document are trademarks, registered trademarks, or trade names of their respective holders.

To the Holder of the DocumentThe contents of this document are current as of the date of publication. ADTRAN® reserves the right to change the contents without prior notice.

In no event will ADTRAN be liable for any special, incidental, or consequential damages or for commercial losses even if ADTRAN has been advised thereof as a result of issue of this document.

901 Explorer BoulevardP.O. Box 140000

Huntsville, AL 35814-4000(256) 963-8000

©2007 ADTRAN, Inc.All Rights Reserved.

®

ii 61189901L1-1B

Revision History

ConventionsThe following typographical conventions are used in this document:

This font indicates a cross-reference link.

This font indicates screen menus, fields, and parameters.

THIS FONT indicates keyboard keys (ENTER, ESC, ALT). Keys that are to be pressed simulta-neously are shown with a plus sign (ALT+X indicates that the ALT key and X key should be pressed at the same time).

This font indicates references to other documentation and is also used for emphasis.

This font indicates on-screen messages and prompts.

This font indicates text to be typed exactly as shown.

This font indicates silk-screen labels or other system label items.

This font is used for strong emphasis.

NOTENotes inform the user of additional, but essential, information or features.

CAUTIONCautions inform the user of potential damage, malfunction, or dis-ruption to equipment, software, or environment.

WARNINGWarnings inform the user of potential bodily pain, injury, or death.

Revision Date Description of Changes

A June 2006 This version of the manual reflects application software version B01.

B October 2007 For this version, added the MX3112 Controller Card (P/N 1189901L2). This version of the manual reflects application soft-ware version D01.

61189901L1-1B iii


TrainingADTRAN offers training courses on our products. These courses include overviews on product features and functions while covering applications of ADTRAN product lines. ADTRAN provides a variety of training options, including customized training and courses taught at our facilities or at customer sites.

For inquiries concerning training, contact ADTRAN:

Training Phone: 800-615-1176, ext. 7500

Training Fax: 256-963-6700

Training Email: [email protected]

iv 61189901L1-1B

Contents

Section 1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Data Path Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3Copper Mode Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3DS3 Mode Block Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4Data Path Provisioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

The Quick Setup Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Application Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Flow System Provisioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

Front Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8ACO Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Section 2Engineering Guidelines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Dimensions of Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

System Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3System Configurations - Copper Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3System Configurations - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Fuse Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Network Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Cable Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

DSX-1 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Section 3Application Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Bookend MX3112 Systems - Copper Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Bookend MX3112 Systems - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

OPTI-6100 and MX3112 Systems - Copper Mode and DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Equipment Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

61189901L1-1B v


Section 4Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Required Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Required Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Installing the MX3 Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Rackmount Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Wallmount Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Power Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5Rear Chassis Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

Installing Cards and Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10Installing the Fan Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10Installing the MX3112 Controller Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11Installing the MX3ETH4 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

Section 5Provisioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Provisioning Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Flow System Provisioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5EVCs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

EVC Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6EVC Alias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6EVC Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7EVC State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7EVC Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7EVC VLAN ID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7CE-VLAN ID Preservation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Map Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Associated EVC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Map Alias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Map Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Map State. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9UNI Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9CE VLAN ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10CE VLAN P-bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10DSCP value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Untagged and Priority Tagged Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Class of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Example #1: Two CE VLANs Mapped to Two EVCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Example #2: Two CE VLANs Mapped to One EVC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Bandwidth Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14Bandwidth Profile Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Profile Alias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14Profile Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14Profile State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15UNI port of profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15EVC of profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

vi 61189901L1-1B

Contents

CoS value(s) of profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16Rate Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16CIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16CBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16EIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16EBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Example #1: Ingress Bandwidth Profile per UNI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17Example #2: Ingress Bandwidth Profile per EVC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18Example #3: Ingress Bandwidth Profile per Class of Service Identifier on an EVC . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19Example #4: Ingress Bandwidth Profile per Custom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

Rules for Provisioning Maps, EVCs, and Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Section 6User Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

System Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Craft Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Remote Menu (DS1 Mode Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Network Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Network Management Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Example 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Example 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9Example 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

Logging on to the MX3112 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11

Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

Menu Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13

Menu Trees. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31

Menu Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51MX3112 Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51

Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53Provisioning Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55

Application Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57E1 Framing Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60

DS3 Interface Menu - DS3 Mode Only. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62Equipment Identification Menu - DS3 Mode Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64

DS1/E1 Port Interfaces Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66DS1/E1 Port Provisioning Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68Copy Provisioning to Multiple Ports Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-71

DS1/E1 Bonding Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73DS1/E1 Port 1–12 Menu - Copper Mode Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75DS3 Tributary Provisioning Menu - DS3 Mode Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77Timing Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-79

Timing Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-82Link Identifiers Menu (DS1 Mode Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-83

Link Identifiers DS1 Port Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-85Bonding Groups Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-86

61189901L1-1B vii


Bonding Group Provisioning Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-88Flows Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-90

EVCs Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-91Edit EVC Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93

Maps Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-95Edit Map Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-97

Profiles Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-100Edit Profile Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-102

Quick-Set Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-105Egress Queue Depths Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-107

Ethernet Client Ports Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-108Ethernet Client Ports Provisioning Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-109

Equipment Protection Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-111General Provisioning Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-112Network Management Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-114

Management Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-116Rear Ethernet Interface Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-118Network Service Ports Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-120SNMP Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-121

Trap Host Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-123Auto Save Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-125Security Administration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-126

Users Currently Logged On Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-127Edit Accounts Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-128

Edit User Account Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-130Access Tech Support Account Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-131

Quick Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-132Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-136

Controller Equipment Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-138DS3 Status Menu - DS3 Mode Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-140Environmental Alarms Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-144Ethernet Client Ports Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-146DS1/E1 Ports Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-147Bonding Group Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-149

Test Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-152DS1/E1 Port Test Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-154Bonding DS1/E1s Menu - Copper Mode Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-156Bonding DS1s Menu - DS3 Mode Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-157DS3 Test Menu - DS3 Mode Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-159DS1s in DS3 Menu - DS3 Mode Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-160

DS1 in DS3 Test Menu - DS3 Mode Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-161Test Alarm Relays Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-163

Performance Monitoring Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-165DS3 Stats Menu - DS3 Mode Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-167

Near End Daily Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-170Near End Quarter Hourly Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-171Far End Daily Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-172Far End Quarter Hourly Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-173Near End Thresholds Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-175

Threshold and Alarm Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-176Far End Thresholds Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-177

Threshold and Alarm Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-178DS1/E1 Port Stats Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-179

viii 61189901L1-1B

Contents

DS1/E1 # Port Stats Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-180Near End Daily Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-181Near End Quarter Hourly Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-182Near End Thresholds Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-183Threshold and Alarm Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-184

DS1/E1 Bonding Stats Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-185DS1/E1 # Bonding Stats Menu - Copper Mode Only. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-187DS1 Tributary # Bonding Stats Menu - DS3 Mode Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-189

Near End Daily Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-192Near End Quarter Hourly Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-193Far End Daily Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-194Far End Quarter Hourly Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-195Near End Thresholds Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-196Threshold and Alarm Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-197Far End Thresholds Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-198Threshold and Alarm Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-199

Bonding Group Stats Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-200Bonding Group # Stats Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-201

Daily Performance Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-202Quarter Hourly Performance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-203Thresholds Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-204Threshold and Alarm Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-205

Ethernet Stats Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-206Ethernet Port # Stats Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-207

Daily Performance Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-209Quarter Hourly Performance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-210Thresholds Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-211Threshold and Alarm Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-212

System Alarms Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-213Master Alarms Log Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-214Controller Alarms Log Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-216User-Definable Alarms Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-218

Environmental Alarms Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-219Auxiliary Input Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-220Power Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-221

Remote Management Menu (DS1 Mode Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-222Firmware Upgrade Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-223

Method Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-224TFTP Update Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-225

TFTP Update Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-226Logout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-227

Section 7Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

MX3 Fan Module Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Firmware Upgrade Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Upgrading a Redundant System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Controller-to-Controller Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

61189901L1-1B ix


Appendix AWarranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

Warranty and Customer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1ADTRAN Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1ADTRAN Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1ADTRAN Repair/CAPS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1Repair and Return Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

x 61189901L1-1B

Figures

Figures

Figure 1-1. MX3112 System Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Figure 1-2. Copper Mode Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4Figure 1-3. DS3 Mode Block Diagram - List 1 Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Figure 1-4. DS3 Mode Block Diagram - List 2 Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Figure 1-5. MX3112 Controller Card LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Figure 3-1. Physical Configuration of Bookend MX3112 Systems - Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Figure 3-2. Logical Configuration of Bookend MX3112 Systems - Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Figure 3-3. Physical Configuration of Bookend MX3112 Systems - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Figure 3-4. Logical Configuration of Bookend MX3112 Systems - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Figure 3-5. Physical Configuration of OPTI-6100 and MX3112 Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Figure 3-6. Logical Configuration of OPTI-6100 and MX3112 Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Figure 4-1. 19-inch Rack Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Figure 4-2. 23-inch Rack Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Figure 4-3. Wallmount Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Figure 4-4. Power Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5Figure 4-5. Fuse and Alarm Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6Figure 4-6. MX3 Chassis Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7Figure 4-7. MX3 Fan Module Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10Figure 4-8. MX3112 Controller Card Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12Figure 4-9. MX3ETH4 Module Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13Figure 5-1. E-Line service using a Point-to-Point EVC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Figure 5-2. E-Line service using two Point-to-Point EVCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Figure 5-3. E-Line service using two Point-to-Point EVCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Figure 5-4. E-Line service using a Point-to-Point EVC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Figure 5-5. E-Line service using a Point-to-Point EVC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Figure 6-1. Craft Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Figure 6-2. Remote Management Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Figure 6-3. Quick Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Figure 6-4. Management Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Figure 6-5. Management Mode Selection Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Figure 6-6. Management VLAN ID Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Figure 6-7. Management Port/Group Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Figure 6-8. VLAN-Based Management of a Remote MX3112 through a GEFM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Figure 6-9. VLAN-Based Management of a Remote MX3112 through Two GEFMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9Figure 6-10. VLAN-Based Management of Local and Remote MX3112s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10Figure 6-11. MX3112 Main Menu Tree - Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15Figure 6-12. Provisioning Menu Trees - Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16Figure 6-13. Network Management Menu Tree - Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22Figure 6-14. Quick Setup Menu Tree - Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23Figure 6-15. Status and Test Menu Trees - Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24Figure 6-16. Performance Monitoring Menu Tree - Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25Figure 6-17. DS1 Port Statistics Menu Tree - Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26Figure 6-18. DS1 Bonding Statistics Menu Tree - Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27Figure 6-19. Bonding Group Statistics Menu Tree - Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28Figure 6-20. Ethernet Client Statistics Menu Tree - Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29Figure 6-21. System Alarms and Firmware Upgrade Menu Trees - Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30Figure 6-22. MX3112 Main Menu Tree - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31Figure 6-23. Provisioning Menu Trees - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32

61189901L1-1B xi


Figure 6-24. Network Management Menu Tree - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39Figure 6-25. Quick Setup Menu Tree - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40Figure 6-26. Status and Test Menu Trees - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41Figure 6-27. Performance Monitoring Menu Tree - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43Figure 6-28. DS3 Statistics Menu Tree - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44Figure 6-29. DS1 Port Statistics Menu Tree - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46Figure 6-30. DS1 Bonding Statistics Menu Tree - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47Figure 6-31. Bonding Group Statistics Menu Tree - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48Figure 6-32. Ethernet Client Statistics Menu Tree - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49Figure 6-33. System Alarms and Firmware Upgrade Menu Trees - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50Figure 6-34. MX3112 Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51Figure 6-35. Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53Figure 6-36. Provisioning Menu - Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55Figure 6-37. Provisioning Menu - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55Figure 6-38. Application Mode Menu - DS1 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57Figure 6-39. Application Mode Menu - E1 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57Figure 6-40. E1 Framing Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60Figure 6-41. DS3 Interface Menu - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62Figure 6-42. Equipment Identification Menu - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64Figure 6-43. DS1/E1 Port Interfaces Menu - Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66Figure 6-44. DS1/E1 Port Interfaces Menu - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66Figure 6-45. DS1/E1 Port Provisioning Menu - Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68Figure 6-46. DS1/E1 Port Provisioning Menu - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-69Figure 6-47. Copy Provisioning to Multiple Ports Menu - Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-71Figure 6-48. Copy Provisioning to Multiple Ports Menu - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-71Figure 6-49. DS1/E1 Bonding Menu - Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73Figure 6-50. DS1/E1 Bonding Menu - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73Figure 6-51. DS1/E1 Port 1–12 Menu - Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75Figure 6-52. DS3 Tributary Provisioning Menu - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77Figure 6-53. Timing Menu (Timing Mode = Local or Loop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-79Figure 6-54. Timing Menu (Timing Mode = Line) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-80Figure 6-55. Timing Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-82Figure 6-56. Link Identifiers Menu - Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-83Figure 6-57. Link Identifiers Menu - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-83Figure 6-58. Link Identifiers DS1 Port Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-85Figure 6-59. Bonding Groups Menu - RT Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-86Figure 6-60. Bonding Groups Menu - COT Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-86Figure 6-61. Bonding Group Provisioning Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-88Figure 6-62. Flows Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-90Figure 6-63. EVCs Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-91Figure 6-64. Edit EVC Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93Figure 6-65. Maps Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-95Figure 6-66. Edit Map Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-97Figure 6-67. Profiles Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-100Figure 6-68. Edit Profile Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-102Figure 6-69. Quick-Set Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-105Figure 6-70. One-to-One Port/Group Mapping with Default EVC VIDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-106Figure 6-71. One-to-One Port/Group Mapping with Transparent EVCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-106Figure 6-72. Egress Queue Depths Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-107Figure 6-73. Ethernet Client Ports Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-108Figure 6-74. Ethernet Client Ports Provisioning Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-109

xii 61189901L1-1B

Figures

Figure 6-75. Equipment Protection Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-111Figure 6-76. General Provisioning Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-112Figure 6-77. Network Management Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-114Figure 6-78. Management Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-116Figure 6-79. Rear Ethernet Interface Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-118Figure 6-80. Network Service Ports Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-120Figure 6-81. SNMP Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-121Figure 6-82. Trap Host Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-123Figure 6-83. Auto Save Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-125Figure 6-84. Security Administration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-126Figure 6-85. Users Currently Logged On Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-127Figure 6-86. Edit Accounts Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-128Figure 6-87. Edit User Account Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-130Figure 6-88. Access Tech Support Account Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-131Figure 6-89. Quick Setup Menu - Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-132Figure 6-90. Quick Setup Menu - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-133Figure 6-91. Status Menu - Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-136Figure 6-92. Status Menu - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-136Figure 6-93. Controller Equipment Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-138Figure 6-94. DS3 Status Menu - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-140Figure 6-95. Environmental Alarms Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-144Figure 6-96. Ethernet Client Ports Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-146Figure 6-97. DS1/E1 Ports Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-147Figure 6-98. Bonding Group Status Screen - Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-149Figure 6-99. Bonding Group Status Screen - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-149Figure 6-100. Test Menu - Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-152Figure 6-101. Test Menu - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-152Figure 6-102. DS1/E1 Port Test Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-154Figure 6-103. Bonding DS1/E1s Menu - Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-156Figure 6-104. Bonding DS1s Menu - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-157Figure 6-105. DS3 Test Menu - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-159Figure 6-106. DS1s in DS3 Menu - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-160Figure 6-107. DS1 in DS3 Test Menu - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-161Figure 6-108. Test Alarm Relays Menu (Alarm Relay Test Status = Inactive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-163Figure 6-109. Test Alarm Relays Menu (Alarm Relay Test Status = Active) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-163Figure 6-110. Performance Monitoring Menu - Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-165Figure 6-111. Performance Monitoring Menu - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-165Figure 6-112. DS3 Stats Menu - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-167Figure 6-113. Near End Daily Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-170Figure 6-114. Near End Quarter Hourly Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-171Figure 6-115. 24-Hour History Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-171Figure 6-116. Far End Daily Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-172Figure 6-117. Far End Quarter Hourly Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-173Figure 6-118. 24-Hour History Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-174Figure 6-119. Near End Thresholds Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-175Figure 6-120. Threshold and Alarm Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-176Figure 6-121. Far End Thresholds Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-177Figure 6-122. Threshold and Alarm Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-178Figure 6-123. DS1/E1 Port Stats Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-179Figure 6-124. DS1/E1 # Port Stats Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-180Figure 6-125. Near End Daily Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-181

61189901L1-1B xiii


Figure 6-126. Near End Quarter Hourly Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-182Figure 6-127. 24-Hour History Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-182Figure 6-128. Near End Thresholds Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-183Figure 6-129. Threshold and Alarm Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-184Figure 6-130. DS1/E1 Bonding Stats Menu - Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-185Figure 6-131. DS1 Bonding Stats Menu - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-185Figure 6-132. DS1/E1 # Bonding Stats Menu - Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-187Figure 6-133. DS1 Tributary # Bonding Stats Menu - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-189Figure 6-134. Near End Daily Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-192Figure 6-135. Near End Quarter Hourly Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-193Figure 6-136. 24-Hour History Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-193Figure 6-137. Far End Daily Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-194Figure 6-138. Far End Quarter Hourly Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-195Figure 6-139. 24-Hour History Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-195Figure 6-140. Near End Thresholds Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-196Figure 6-141. Threshold and Alarm Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-197Figure 6-142. Far End Thresholds Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-198Figure 6-143. Threshold and Alarm Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-199Figure 6-144. Bonding Group Stats Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-200Figure 6-145. Bonding Group # Stats Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-201Figure 6-146. Daily Performance Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-202Figure 6-147. Quarter Hourly Performance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-203Figure 6-148. 24-Hour History Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-203Figure 6-149. Thresholds Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-204Figure 6-150. Threshold and Alarm Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-205Figure 6-151. Ethernet Stats Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-206Figure 6-152. Ethernet Port # Stats Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-207Figure 6-153. Daily Performance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-209Figure 6-154. Detailed Daily Performance Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-209Figure 6-155. Quarter Hourly Performance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-210Figure 6-156. 24-Hour History Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-210Figure 6-157. Thresholds Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-211Figure 6-158. Threshold and Alarm Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-212Figure 6-159. System Alarms Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-213Figure 6-160. Master Alarms Log Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-214Figure 6-161. Controller Alarms Log Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-216Figure 6-162. User-Definable Alarms Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-218Figure 6-163. Environmental Alarms Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-219Figure 6-164. Auxiliary Input Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-220Figure 6-165. Power Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-221Figure 6-166. Remote Management Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-222Figure 6-167. Firmware Upgrade Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-223Figure 6-168. Method Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-224Figure 6-169. TFTP Update Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-225Figure 6-170. TFTP Update Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-226Figure 7-1. Firmware Upgrade Method Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Figure 7-2. Firmware Upgrade Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Figure 7-3. Method Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

xiv 61189901L1-1B

Tables

Tables

Table 1-1. MX3112 System Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Table 1-2. Tributaries for Channelized DS3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3Table 1-3. Mapping and Bonding Group Assignments - List 1 Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Table 1-4. Mapping and Bonding Group Assignments - List 2 Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Table 1-5. Active MX3112 Controller Card LED Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Table 1-6. Standby MX3112 Controller Card LED Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Table 2-1. MX3112 Equipment Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Table 2-2. Maximum Current Draw - Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3Table 2-3. Heat Dissipation - Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3Table 2-4. Maximum Current Draw - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Table 2-5. Heat Dissipation - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Table 2-6. Fuse Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Table 2-7. Amphenol Connector Pin List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Table 3-1. Equipment Required - MX3112 Ethernet Transport Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Table 4-1. Amphenol Connector Pin List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8Table 4-2. AUX Inputs 1 - 8 Pin List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9Table 4-3. Ethernet Pin Assignments for Ports 1–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13Table 5-1. Default Provisioning Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1Table 5-2. Additional Default Provisioning Options for DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Table 5-3. EVC Status Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Table 5-4. EVC State Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Table 5-5. CE-VLAN ID Preservation Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Table 5-6. Map Status Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Table 5-7. Map State Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Table 5-8. Untagged and Priority Tagged Frame Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Table 5-9. Profile Status Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14Table 5-10. Profile State Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15Table 5-11. Application Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15Table 5-12. Rate Coupling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16Table 6-1. MX3112 Keyboard Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13Table 6-2. MX3112 Main Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51Table 6-3. Configuration Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53Table 6-4. Provisioning Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56Table 6-5. Application Mode Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58Table 6-6. Application Mode Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59Table 6-7. E1 Framing Mode Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60Table 6-8. DS3 Interface Menu Options - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62Table 6-9. Equipment Identification Menu Options - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64Table 6-10. DS1 Port Interfaces Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-67Table 6-11. DS1/E1 Port Provisioning Menu Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-69Table 6-12. Copy Provisioning to Multiple Ports Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-72Table 6-13. DS1/E1 Bonding Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-74Table 6-14. DS1/E1 Bonding Menu Hot Keys - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-74Table 6-15. DS1/E1 Port 1–12 Menu Options - Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75Table 6-16. DS3 Tributary Provisioning Menu Options - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77Table 6-17. Timing Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-79Table 6-18. Timing Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-80Table 6-19. Timing Mode Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-82

61189901L1-1B xv


Table 6-20. Link Identifiers Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-84Table 6-21. Link Identifiers Menu Hot Keys - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-84Table 6-22. Link Identifiers DS1 Port Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-85Table 6-23. Bonding Groups Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-87Table 6-24. Bonding Group Provisioning Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-88Table 6-25. Flows Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-90Table 6-26. EVCs Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-91Table 6-27. EVCs Menu Hot Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-92Table 6-28. Edit EVC Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93Table 6-29. EVC Status Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-94Table 6-30. Maps Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-95Table 6-31. Maps Menu Hot Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-96Table 6-32. Edit Map Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-97Table 6-33. Map Status Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-98Table 6-34. Maps Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-100Table 6-35. Profiles Menu Hot Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-101Table 6-36. Edit Profile Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-102Table 6-37. Profile Status Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-103Table 6-38. Quick-Set Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-105Table 6-39. Egress Queue Depths Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-107Table 6-40. Ethernet Client Port Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-108Table 6-41. Ethernet Client Ports Provisioning Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-109Table 6-42. Equipment Protection Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-111Table 6-43. General Provisioning Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-113Table 6-44. Network Management Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-114Table 6-45. Management Mode Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-116Table 6-46. Management Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-117Table 6-47. Rear Ethernet Interface Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-118Table 6-48. Network Service Ports Menu Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-120Table 6-49. SNMP Menu Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-121Table 6-50. Trap Host Menu Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-123Table 6-51. Trap Host Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-124Table 6-52. Auto Save Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-125Table 6-53. Security Administration Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-126Table 6-54. Users Currently Logged On Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-127Table 6-55. Edit Accounts Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-128Table 6-56. Edit Accounts Menu Hot Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-128Table 6-57. Edit User Accounts Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-129Table 6-58. Edit User Account Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-130Table 6-59. Quick Setup Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-133Table 6-60. Status Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-137Table 6-61. Controller Equipment Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-138Table 6-62. Status for Active Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-138Table 6-63. Status for Standby Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-139Table 6-64. Alarm Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-139Table 6-65. DS3 Status Menu Fields - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-140Table 6-66. Alarm Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-141Table 6-67. Remote System Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-142Table 6-68. DS2 Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-143Table 6-69. DS3 Status Menu Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-143Table 6-70. Environmental Alarms Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-144

xvi 61189901L1-1B

Tables

Table 6-71. Environmental Alarm External Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-145Table 6-72. Ethernet Client Ports Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-146Table 6-73. DS1/E1 Ports Status Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-147Table 6-74. Bonding Group Status Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-150Table 6-75. Bonding Group States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-150Table 6-76. Bonding Group Status Screen Hot Keys - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-150Table 6-77. DS1/E1 Port States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-151Table 6-78. Test Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-153Table 6-79. DS1/E1 Port Test Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-154Table 6-80. Bonding DS1/E1s Menu Options - Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-156Table 6-81. Bonded DS1/E1 Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-156Table 6-82. Bonding DS1s Menu Options - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-157Table 6-83. DS1 Tributary Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-158Table 6-84. DS3 Test Menu Options - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-159Table 6-85. DS1s in DS3 Menu Options - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-160Table 6-86. DS1 in DS3 Test Menu Options - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-161Table 6-87. Test Alarm Relays Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-164Table 6-88. Performance Monitoring Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-166Table 6-89. DS3 Stats Menu Options - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-167Table 6-90. DS3 Near End Parameter Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-168Table 6-91. DS3 Far End Parameter Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-169Table 6-92. Near End Thresholds Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-175Table 6-93. Threshold and Alarm Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-176Table 6-94. Far End Thresholds Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-177Table 6-95. Threshold and Alarm Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-178Table 6-96. DS1/E1 Port Stats Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-179Table 6-97. DS1/E1 # Port Stats Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-180Table 6-98. Near End Parameter Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-181Table 6-99. Near End Thresholds Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-183Table 6-100. Threshold and Alarm Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-184Table 6-101. DS1/E1 Bonding Stats Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-186Table 6-102. DS1/E1 # Bonding Stats Menu Options - Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-187Table 6-103. DS1 Tributary # Bonding Stats Menu Options - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-189Table 6-104. Near End Parameter Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-190Table 6-105. Far End Parameter Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-191Table 6-106. Near End Thresholds Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-196Table 6-107. Threshold and Alarm Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-197Table 6-108. Far End Thresholds Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-198Table 6-109. Threshold and Alarm Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-199Table 6-110. Bonding Group Stats Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-200Table 6-111. Bonding Group # Stats Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-201Table 6-112. Bonding Group Parameter Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-202Table 6-113. Thresholds Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-204Table 6-114. Threshold and Alarm Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-205Table 6-115. Ethernet Stats Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-206Table 6-116. Ethernet Port # Stats Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-207Table 6-117. Ethernet Parameter Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-208Table 6-118. Thresholds Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-211Table 6-119. Threshold and Alarm Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-212Table 6-120. System Alarms Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-213Table 6-121. Master Alarms Log Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-214

61189901L1-1B xvii


Table 6-122. Master Alarms Log Screen Hot Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-215Table 6-123. Controller Alarms Log Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-216Table 6-124. Controller Alarms Log Screen Hot Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-217Table 6-125. User-Definable Alarms Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-218Table 6-126. Environmental Alarms Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-219Table 6-127. Auxiliary Input Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-220Table 6-128. Power Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-221Table 6-129. Remote Management Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-222Table 6-130. Firmware Upgrade Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-223Table 6-131. Method Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-224Table 6-132. Method Menu Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-225Table 6-133. TFTP Update Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-225Table 6-134. TFTP Update Status Screen Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-226Table 6-135. TFTP Download Progress Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-227Table 6-136. TFTP Update Status Screen Hot Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-227

xviii 61189901L1-1B

Section 1Introduction

GENERAL

The MX3112 system (see Figure 1-1) enables Ethernet service delivery over multiple bonded DS1 or E1 paths. Depending on the controller card, the MX3112 system bonds up to twelve DS1/E1 channels (MX3112 Controller Card, P/N 1189901L1) or up to sixteen DS1 channels (MX3112 Controller Card, P/N 1189901L2) into bonding groups to conduct Ethernet traffic from four 10/100Base-T Ethernet ports.

Figure 1-1. MX3112 System Front Panel

The MX3112 system components are provided in Table 1-1.

For detailed specification information on the products listed, refer to the “Section 2, Engineering Guidelines”.

Table 1-1. MX3112 System Part Numbers

Description Part Number CLEI

MX3 Chassis 1189001L1 M3M2A00A_ _

MX3112 Controller Card (List 1 Controller)orMX3112 Controller Card (List 2 Controller)

1189901L1or1189901L2

M3CU100B_ _

M3CU180B_ _

MX3 4-Port 10/100Base-T Ethernet Module (MX3ETH4) 1189902L1 M3LIPC0A_ _

MX3 Fan Module 1189007L1 M3CU270B_ _

MX3 Controller Blank Plug 1189005L1 N/A

MX3 Module Blank Plug 1189006L1 N/A

B

A

MX3112 Controller Card MX3 4-Port Ethernet Module MX3 ChassisMX3 Fan Module

61189901L1-1B 1-1


FEATURESThe major features of the MX3112 system are as follows:

• Chassis supports dual controller cards and two expansion modules

• Rack-mountable chassis (19-inch or 23-inch racks)

• Compact 1 RU size

• Hot-swappable controller cards provide 1:1 redundancy

• Bonds up to sixteen DS1s or twelve E1s into up to four bonding groups for Ethernet delivery

• Supports four 10/100Base-T Ethernet facilities

• Supports a variety of application modes

• Provides graceful handling of impairments of bonded DS1s or E1s

• Provides monitoring of differential delay (skew) on bonded DS1s or E1s

• Supports a system of flow provisioning that is consistent with Metro Ethernet Forum (MEF) guidelines

• Supports a variety of transmit timing options for bonded DS1s or E1s

• Supports a variety of methods of management

– VT100 menus via front panel RS-232 craft port

– VT100 menus of a remote MX3112 system accessible via an in-band channel from a local MX3112 system or OPTI-6100® GEFM module

– Ethernet connectivity providing VT100 menus, TL1 access, and SNMP access either locally via a RJ-45 10/100Base-T Ethernet port on the chassis or remotely via a VLAN on a designated bonding group or customer Ethernet port

• Supports a comprehensive suite of loopbacks and other test features

• Supports a comprehensive suite of performance monitoring statistics for all interfaces

• Supports a large variety of applications involving other MX3112 systems and the OPTI-6100 GEFM module (P/N 1184535L1)

• NEBS Level 3 compliant

• Powered via ±24 VDC or –48 VDC

• Extended temperature range, –40°C to +65°C

• Wire-wrap pins available for critical, major, and minor alarm indications

• Four auxiliary alarm inputs, any of which can be designated as alarm cut-off (ACO)

• Dual independent power feeds with separate return paths to all card slots

1-2 61189901L1-1B

Section 1, Introduction - Data Path Description

DATA PATH DESCRIPTIONThe MX3112 system supports an application mode that controls whether the bonded DS1/E1 channels are accessed. The two modes are listed as follows:

• Copper mode: In copper mode, twelve bonded DS1/E1 facilities are directly accessible via amphenol connectors on the rear side of the chassis.

• DS3 mode: In DS3 mode, a channelized DS3 is supported with tributaries available as shown in Table 1-2.

The block diagrams that follow describe the operation of the MX3112 system in each mode. The default mode is copper mode.

Copper Mode Block DiagramWhen operating in copper mode, the MX3112 system directly routes twelve bonded DS1/E1 channels to the amphenol interfaces on the rear of the chassis. The integrated M13 multi-plexer and the DS3 interface are effectively unused when operating in copper mode.

Figure 1-2 illustrates the functional block diagram of the MX3112 system when operating in copper mode.

Table 1-2. Tributaries for Channelized DS3

Tributaries Description

1–12 Tributaries are cross connected to the twelve physical DSX-1 ports on the amphenol connectors of the chassis available for carrying TDM traffic.

13–24 Tibutaries are available for bonding together into groups for carrying Ethernet traffic.

25–28 For the List 1 Controller, these tributaries are not used.For the List 2 Controller, these tributaries are available for bonding DS1s together into groups for carrying Ethernet traffic.

61189901L1-1B 1-3


Figure 1-2. Copper Mode Block Diagram

DS3 Mode Block DiagramWhen operating in DS3 mode, the MX3112 system supports a full M13 multiplexer of which the DS1 tributaries carry a combination of TDM traffic and bonded traffic. The channelized DS3 that is produced operates in either C-bit or M13 framing modes.

The first twelve DS1 tributaries of the DS3 are available for carrying TDM traffic and are directly accessible via the amphenol connectors on the rear side of the chassis. The remaining DS1 tributaries can be bonded together to carry Ethernet traffic from the four Ethernet ports, depending on controller card list version.

• The List 1 Controller uses twelve DS1 tributaries (13–24) for bonding and does not use the remaining four tributaries (25–28).

• The List 2 Controller uses all sixteen DS1 tributaries (13–28) for bonding.

The diagrams to follow illustrate the functional block diagram of the MX3112 system when operating in DS3 mode. Figure 1-3 illustrates the MX3112 system using the List 1 Controller, and Figure 1-4 illustrates the MX3112 system using the List 2 Controller.

Port 1

Port 2

Port 3

Port 4

DS1/E1 #1DS1/E1 #2DS1/E1 #3DS1/E1 #4DS1/E1 #5DS1/E1 #6DS1/E1 #7DS1/E1 #8

DS1/E1 #12

DS1/E1 #9DS1/E1 #10DS1/E1 #11

MX3ETH44-Port10/100 Base-TEthernet Module

MX3ETH41189902L1

PORT 1 PORT 2 PORT 3 PORT 4

DS1LIUs

Bonding Engine

DS1Framers

Ethernet Ports

Switch

G1

G2

G3

G4

P1

P2

P3

P4

FramersFDS1DS1/E1

FramersBondingEngine

Bonding EngineLIUsLIU

DS1DS1/E1LIUs

PHY

PHY

PHY

PHY

DS1sBondingGroups

(Controller Card)

1-4 61189901L1-1B


Figure 1-3. DS3 Mode Block Diagram - List 1 Controller

Figure 1-4. DS3 Mode Block Diagram - List 2 Controller

PHY

PHY

PHY

PHY

Port 1

Port 2

Port 3

Port 4

DS3A DS3LIU

Bonding Engine

Switch


G1

DS1s

G2

DS1 #1DS1 #2DS1 #3DS1 #4DS1 #5DS1 #6DS1 #7DS1 #8

DS1 #12

DS1 #9DS1 #10DS1 #11

G3

G4

P1

P2

P3

P4

DS1LIUs

DS1Framers

BondingGroups

MX3ETH41189902L1


(Controller Card)

DS1 trib #13DS1 trib #14DS1 trib #15DS1 trib #16DS1 trib #17DS1 trib #18DS1 trib #19DS1 trib #20

DS1 trib #24

DS1 trib #21DS1 trib #22DS1 trib #23


DS1 trib #12


PHY

PHY

PHY

PHY

Port 1

Port 2

Port 3

Port 4

DS3A DS3LIU

Bonding Engine

Switch


G1

DS1s

G2

DS1 #1DS1 #2DS1 #3DS1 #4DS1 #5DS1 #6DS1 #7DS1 #8

DS1 #12

DS1 #9DS1 #10DS1 #11

G3

G4

P1

P2

P3

P4

DS1LIUs

DS1Framers

BondingGroups

MX3ETH41189902L1


(Controller Card)


DS1 trib #24DS1 trib #25DS1 trib #26DS1 trib #27DS1 trib #28



DS1 trib #12


61189901L1-1B 1-5


Table 1-3 shows the mapping and bonding group assignments for DS3 Mode for the MX3112 system when using the List 1 Controller.

Table 1-4 shows the mapping and bonding group assignments for DS3 Mode for the MX3112 system when using the List 2 Controller.

Table 1-3. Mapping and Bonding Group Assignments - List 1 Controller

DS3 Tributary Assignment DS3 Tributary Assignment1 DSX-1 Port 1 15 User Assigned Bonding Group

2 DSX-1 Port 2 16 User Assigned Bonding Group









11 DSX-1 Port 11 25 N/A

12 DSX-1 Port 12 26 N/A

13 User Assigned Bonding Group 27 N/A

14 User Assigned Bonding Group 28 N/A

Table 1-4. Mapping and Bonding Group Assignments - List 2 Controller

DS3 Tributary Assignment DS3 Tributary Assignment1 DSX-1 Port 1 15 User Assigned Bonding Group












13 User Assigned Bonding Group 27 User Assigned Bonding Group

14 User Assigned Bonding Group 28 User Assigned Bonding Group

1-6 61189901L1-1B


Data Path ProvisioningThe MX3112 system is flexible for a wide variety of applications and supports a user interface designed to simplify and expedite the process of provisioning the data path. This section briefly describes the most important steps for provisioning the system. For more information on the Ethernet packet flow system, refer to “Flow System Provisioning” on page 5-5.

The Quick Setup MenuThe MX3112 system supports several provisioning options to assist with optimizing the data path for a specific application. To expedite the process of turning up the system, the “Quick Setup Menu” is designed to provide fast access to the options that are often most critical for provisioning the system.

Application ModesThe application mode of the MX3112 system has the following main components:

• Basic flow system configuration

– Copper mode versus DS3 mode

– DS1 mode versus E1 mode

• Administrative role of the system

– Central Office Terminal (COT) mode

– Remote Terminal (RT) mode

The first component of the application mode (copper/DS3) is described in the “Copper Mode Block Diagram” on page 1-3 and the “DS3 Mode Block Diagram” on page 1-4. In addition to the copper/DS3 mode, the product supports a DS1/E1 mode that controls whether the paths are formatted as DS1s or E1s.

The second component of the application mode (COT/RT) typically reflects the location and role of the system in a network in relation to the far end equipment that terminates the bonded DS1/E1 channels. In general, the near end MX3112 system is provisioned as COT and the far end (remote) system is provisioned as RT.

A benefit of this component of the application mode is that it allows automatic provisioning of assignments of DS1s to bonding groups at the RT system to reflect the provisioning at the COT system. Certain key provisioning options are transferred automatically from the COT system to the RT system, which expedites the turn-up process.

Flow System ProvisioningAfter provisioning the application modes of the system, two primary steps are involved in provisioning the flow system.

1. Assign DS1/E1s to bonding groups

2. Provision rules (called flows) to route traffic among the Ethernet ports and bonding groups

As shown in Figure 1-2 through Figure 1-4, the MX3112 system contains a switch component that effectively has eight ports. Four of these ports (P1–P4) are associated with the four customer 10/100Base-T Ethernet ports, which are accessible via the MX3ETH4. The remaining four ports (G1–G4) are bonding groups. Provision each of the four bonding groups to consist of one or more DS1/E1s. Assign the DS1/E1s that are available for bonding in any combination among the four bonding groups.

61189901L1-1B 1-7


FRONT PANELThe MX3112 Controller Card has nine LEDs located on the front panel (see Figure 1-5) that display status information. Table 1-5 shows the LED status descriptions for the active MX3112 Controller Card. Table 1-6 shows the status descriptions for the standby MX3112 Controller Card.

Figure 1-5. MX3112 Controller Card LEDs

Table 1-5. Active MX3112 Controller Card LED Status

LED LED State Card Condition

ACT/

/�

GreenGreen/Amber (Alternating)AmberAmber/Red (Alternating)Red (Flashing)

Normal (All OK)Normal and console openSoftware update in progressCard has failed and console openCard has failed

ALM

�

GreenRedRed (Flashing)

No critical, major, or minor alarmsMajor or minor alarm in progressCritical alarm in progress

DS3

/

�

�

�

OffGreenGreen/Red (Alternating)RedAmberAmber (Flashing)Red (Flashing)Red (Flashing once per event)

Copper (DSX-1) mode selectedNormal (DS3 OK)DS2 OOFAIS, OOF, RAI, or IdleIn test (locally originated)In test (remotely originated)DS3 LOSSingle/Burst DS3 code violations during previous second

DSX-1 STAT

�

�

OffGreenRed

Red (Flashing)Red (Flashing once per event)

All DS1/E1 ports are disabledEnabled DS1/E1 ports normal (All OK)Non-critical alarm (AIS) on an enabled DS1/E1 portLOS on an enabled portSingle/Burst RX DS1/E1 code violations during previous second

DSX-1 TEST

�

�

OffAmberAmber (Flashing)Red (Flashing once per event)

No DS1/E1 tests in progressIn test (locally originated)In test (remotely originated)Single/Burst pattern errors on DS1/E1 test

ETHERNET 1-4 OffGreen

Link not establishedLink established

1-8 61189901L1-1B

Section 1, Introduction - Front Panel

ACO ButtonThe alarm cut off (ACO) button disables any audible alarms. Any active visual alarms remain active. Press the ACO button on the front panel to disable any audible alarms.

Table 1-6. Standby MX3112 Controller Card LED Status

LED LED State Card Condition

ACT

�

�

Green (Flashing)AmberAmber (Flashing)Red (Flashing)

Normal (All OK)Software update in progressNot ready or software mismatchCard failure

ALM Off Permanent state during standby

DS3 Off Permanent state during standby

DSX-1 STAT Off Permanent state during standby

DSX-1 TEST Off Permanent state during standby

ETHERNET 1-4 Off Permanent state during standby

61189901L1-1B 1-9


This page is intentionally blank.

1-10 61189901L1-1B

Section 2Engineering Guidelines

INTRODUCTIONThis section provides engineering guidelines for network designers who are incorporating an MX3112 system into their network. This section provides the following guidelines:

• “Dimensions of Equipment” on page 2-2

• “System Power Requirements” on page 2-3

– “System Configurations - Copper Mode” on page 2-3

– “System Configurations - DS3 Mode” on page 2-4

– “Fuse Recommendations” on page 2-5

• “Network Connections” on page 2-5

• “DSX-1 Connections” on page 2-6

• “Compliance” on page 2-6

61189901L1-1B 2-1


DIMENSIONS OF EQUIPMENTTable 2-1 provides the dimensions and weights of the MX3112 equipment.

Table 2-1. MX3112 Equipment Dimensions and Weights

Part Number Equipment Dimensions Weight

1189001L1 MX3 Chassis Height: 1.7 inches Width: 17.0 inches Depth: 8.6 inches

5.50 pounds

1189901L1 MX3112 Controller Card (supports up to 12 bonded DS1s)

Height: 0.7 inches Width: 9.4 inches Depth: 7.6 inches

1.20 pounds

1189901L2 MX3112 Controller Card (supports up to 16 bonded DS1s)


1.20 pounds

1189902L1 MX3 4-Port 10/100Base-T Ethernet Module


1.20 pounds

1189007L1 MX3 Fan Module Height: 1.7 inches Width: 1.5 inches Depth: 7.6 inches

0.50 pounds

1189005L1 MX3 Controller Blank Plug Height: 0.7 inches Width: 9.4 inches Depth: 7.6 inches

1.00 pounds

1189006L1 MX3 Module Blank Plug Height: 0.7 inches Width: 5.2 inches Depth: 7.6 inches

0.50 pounds

2-2 61189901L1-1B

Section 2, Engineering Guidelines - System Power Requirements

SYSTEM POWER REQUIREMENTSThe following sections detail the power requirements for the MX3112 system in copper mode and DS3 mode.

System Configurations - Copper ModeTable 2-2 and Table 2-3 provide the maximum current draw and heat dissipation at –48 VDC (operating range of –42 VDC to –60 VDC) and ±24 VDC (operating range of ±22 VDC to ±27 VDC) for the different MX3112 system configurations in copper mode.

Table 2-2. Maximum Current Draw - Copper Mode

Part Number QuantityMaximum Current Draw

at –48 VDC at ±24 VDC

MX3112 System (non-redundant)

1189901L1 or 1189901L2 1

0.45 amps 0.90 amps1189902L1 1

1189007L1 1

MX3112 System (redundant)

1189901L1 or 1189901L2 2

0.69 amps 1.36 amps1189902L1 1

1189007L1 1

Table 2-3. Heat Dissipation - Copper Mode

Part Number QuantityHeat Dissipation



1189901L1 or 1189901L2 1

19.2 watts 19.7 watts1189902L1 1

1189007L1 1


1189901L1 or 1189901L2 2

29.8 watts 30.0 watts1189902L1 1

1189007L1 1

61189901L1-1B 2-3


System Configurations - DS3 ModeTable 2-4 and Table 2-5 provide the maximum current draw and heat dissipation at –48 VDC (operating range of –42 VDC to –60 VDC) and ±24 VDC (operating range of ±22 VDC to ±27 VDC) for the different MX3112 system configurations in DS3 mode.

Table 2-4. Maximum Current Draw - DS3 Mode

Part Number QuantityMaximum Current Draw



1189901L1 or 1189901L2 1

0.50 amps 1.00 amps1189902L1 1

1189007L1 1


1189901L1 or 1189901L2 2

0.74 amps 1.43 amps1189902L1 1

1189007L1 1

Table 2-5. Heat Dissipation - DS3 Mode

Part Number QuantityHeat Dissipation



1189901L1 or 1189901L2 1

21.0 watts 21.9 watts1189902L1 1

1189007L1 1


1189901L1 or 1189901L2 2

31.5 watts 31.7 watts1189902L1 1

1189007L1 1

2-4 61189901L1-1B

Section 2, Engineering Guidelines - Network Connections

Fuse RecommendationsTable 2-6 provides data for determining the fuse needed for the fuse and alarm panel that services the MX3 chassis.

NETWORK CONNECTIONS

WARNINGDo not metallically connect the DS3, Alarm, DSX-1, and Ethernet interfaces to interfaces which connect to the Outside Plan (OSP) or wiring of the OSP. The DS3, Alarm, DSX-1, and Ethernet interfaces are designed for use as intra-building interfaces only. The addition of Primary Protectors is not sufficient protection, in order to, connect these interfaces metallically to OSP wiring.

Cable Specifications

NOTEConnect DS3 interfaces using coaxial cables that have shields grounded at both ends.

All coaxial cable for the MX3112 DS3 signals should meet the following minimum specifications.

• The coaxial cable should have characteristic impedance of 75 ohms.

• Nominal mutual capacitance should not exceed 20.4 pF/foot.

• The cable should conform to ANSI standard T1.102 (1993) pulse mask definition. The standard reference cable is a “WECO Type 728A” at 450 feet.

Approved cable types include the following:

• WECO 728A

• Lucent 728B

• Lucent 734A

• Lucent 735A (maximum length of 250 feet)

• Belden 9231

• Belden 1809A

Table 2-6. Fuse Recommendations

System Voltage Recommended Fuse

–48 VDC 1.5 amps, slow-blow

±24 VDC 3.0 amps, slow-blow

61189901L1-1B 2-5


DSX-1 CONNECTIONS

WARNINGDo not metallically connect the DS3, Alarm, DSX-1, and Ethernet interfaces to interfaces which connect to the Outside Plan (OSP) or wiring of the OSP. The DS3, Alarm, DSX-1, and Ethernet interfaces are designed for use as intra-building interfaces only. The addition of Primary Protectors is not sufficient protection, in order to, connect these interfaces metallically to OSP wiring.

Table 2-7 provides the amphenol connector pin assignments for the MX3112 Controller Card.

COMPLIANCEFor detailed compliance information on each component of the MX3112 system, refer to the compliance notice packaged with the product.

Table 2-7. Amphenol Connector Pin List

PinFunction

PinRing Tip

1 Ring 1 Tip 1 33

2 Ring 2 Tip 2 34

3 Ring 3 Tip 3 35

4 Ring 4 Tip 4 36

5 Ring 5 Tip 5 37

6 Ring 6 Tip 6 38

7 Ring 7 Tip 7 39

8 Ring 8 Tip 8 40

9 Ring 9 Tip 9 41

10 Ring 10 Tip 10 42

11 Ring 11 Tip 11 43

12 Ring 12 Tip 12 44

32 FGND FGND 64

2-6 61189901L1-1B

Section 3Application Guidelines

INTRODUCTIONThe MX3112 system can operate in a variety of applications with other MX3112 systems, as well as with the OPTI-6100. This section describes some of the more common applications as follows:

• “Bookend MX3112 Systems - Copper Mode” on page 2

• “Bookend MX3112 Systems - DS3 Mode” on page 3

• “OPTI-6100 and MX3112 Systems - Copper Mode and DS3 Mode” on page 4

This section provides illustrations that describe both the physical connectivity of the inter-faces and the logical connectivity of the bonding groups.

61189901L1-1B 3-1


BOOKEND MX3112 SYSTEMS - COPPER MODEFigure 3-1 and Figure 3-2 show example configurations of two MX3112 systems connected in a bookend (back-to-back) configuration while operating in copper mode. Twelve DS1s from each MX3112 system can be bonded together to carry Ethernet traffic. Each bonding group can be provisioned with a specific number of DS1s. For a List 1 Controller in copper mode, the twelve bonded channels can be formatted as either DS1 or E1 (refer to Table 6-5 on page 58).

Figure 3-1. Physical Configuration of Bookend MX3112 Systems - Copper Mode

Figure 3-2. Logical Configuration of Bookend MX3112 Systems - Copper Mode

(Copper/RT Mode)

10/100 Ethernet

10/100 Ethernet

10/100 Ethernet

10/100 Ethernet

10/100 Ethernet

10/100 Ethernet

10/100 Ethernet

10/100 Ethernet

(Copper/COT Mode)

12x DS1 12x DS1

DS1s DS1s

BondingEngine

BondingEngine

(a x DS1)

(b x DS1)

(c x DS1)

(d x DS1)

BondingGroups

For 1189901L1and L2

controllers(a+b+c+d) = up to 12

(Copper/RT Mode)10/100 Ethernet

10/100 Ethernet(Copper/COT Mode)

G1

G2

G3

G4

P1

P2

P3

P4

G1

G2

G3

G4

P1

P2

P3

P4

3-2 61189901L1-1B

Section 3, Application Guidelines - Bookend MX3112 Systems - DS3 Mode

BOOKEND MX3112 SYSTEMS - DS3 MODEFigure 3-3 and Figure 3-4 show example configurations of two MX3112 systems connected in a bookend (back-to-back) configuration while operating in DS3 mode. The channelized DS3 contains DS1 tributaries that can be bonded to carry Ethernet traffic, as well as, DS1 tribu-taries that are physically accessible from the amphenol connections on the chassis. Each bonding group can be provisioned with a specific number of DS1s.

Figure 3-3. Physical Configuration of Bookend MX3112 Systems - DS3 Mode

Figure 3-4. Logical Configuration of Bookend MX3112 Systems - DS3 Mode

(DS3/RT Mode)

10/100 Ethernet

10/100 Ethernet

10/100 Ethernet

10/100 Ethernet

10/100 Ethernet

10/100 Ethernet

10/100 Ethernet

10/100 Ethernet

(DS3/COT Mode)

12x DS1 12x DS1

BondingEngine

n xDS1

n xDS1

DS3 DS3

BondingEngine

For 1189901L1 controllers, n = up to 12For 1189901L2 controllers, n = up to 16

12 X DS1(DS1 tributaries 1-12)

For 1189901L1 controllers(a+b+c+d) = up to 12

For 1189901L2 controllers(a+b+c+d) = up to 16

(a x DS1)

(b x DS1)

(c x DS1)

(d x DS1)

(DS1 tribuaries 13-28)

BondingGroups

(DS3/RT Mode)10/100 Ethernet

10/100 Ethernet(DS3/COT Mode)

P1

P2

P3

P4

G1

G2

G3

G4

G1

G2

G3

G4

P1

P2

P3

P4

61189901L1-1B 3-3


OPTI-6100 AND MX3112 SYSTEMS - COPPER MODE AND DS3 MODEFigure 3-5 and Figure 3-6 show example configurations of an OPTI-6100, containing a GEFM module, terminating the bonded DS1s of two MX3112 systems. One of the MX3112 systems operates in copper mode and the other operates in DS3 mode.

The GEFM module supports a Gigabit Ethernet interface and terminates up to 84 DS1s. The GEFM module supports 30 available bonding groups and can communicate with up to 20 individual MX3112 systems. Each bonding group can be provisioned with a specific number of DS1s. The 84 DS1s from the GEFM module can be cross connected within the OMM to any other module in the OPTI-6100 system. As shown in Figure 3-5, a TRAM module can provide DS3 access and a DS1VME module can provide direct DS1 access to the MX3112 systems.

Refer to the applicable OPTI-6100 documentation for how to provision the OPTI-6100.

Figure 3-5. Physical Configuration of OPTI-6100 and MX3112 Systems

(DS3/RT Mode)

10/100 Ethernet

10/100 Ethernet

10/100 Ethernet

10/100 Ethernet

12x DS1

BondingEngine

n xDS1

DS3 DS3

For 1189901L1 controllers, n = up to 12For 1189901L2 controllers, n = up to 16

(Copper/RT Mode)

10/100 Ethernet

10/100 Ethernet

10/100 Ethernet

10/100 Ethernet

12x DS1DS1s DS1s

BondingEngine

84 xDS1

GigabitEthernet Cross-

Connect

VT1.5BondingEngine

3-4 61189901L1-1B

Section 3, Application Guidelines - OPTI-6100 and MX3112 Systems - Copper Mode and DS3 Mode

Figure 3-6. Logical Configuration of OPTI-6100 and MX3112 Systems

(a x DS1)

(b x DS1)

(c x DS1)

(d x DS1)

BondingGroups

(Copper/RT Mode) 10/100 Ethernet

G1

G2

G3

G4

P1

P2

P3

P4

(e x DS1)

(f x DS1)

(g x DS1)

(h x DS1)

(DS3/RT Mode) 10/100 Ethernet

12 x DS1

G1

G2

G3

G4

P1

P2

P3

P4

DS1 tributaries 1-12within the DS3

GigabitEthernet

G1

G2

G3

G4

G5

G6

G7

G8

Port

Cross-Connect

VT1.5

61189901L1-1B 3-5


Equipment RequiredTable 3-1 lists the equipment needed for the OPTI-6100 and MX3112 system configuration. For OPTI-6100 products, refer to the applicable OPTI-6100 documentation for additional information.

Table 3-1. Equipment Required - MX3112 Ethernet Transport Applications

Equipment Part Number Quantity

OPTI-6100

OPTI-6100 MX Chassis 1184501L1 1

OPTI-6100 System Controller Module 1184500L1 1

OPTI-6100 OC-12 IR ADM Optical Multiplexer Module (OMM) (or equivalent)

1184504L3 1 (2 for redundancy)

OPTI-6100 Triple Transmux Tributary Module (TRAM) (or equivalent)

1184532L1 1 (2 for redundancy)

OPTI-6100 Gigabit Ethernet Over PDH Fiber Module (GEFM)

1184535L1 1

OPTI-6100 Enhanced Fan Assembly 1184507L2 1

MX3112 System

MX3 Chassis 1189001L1 1

MX3112 Controller Card (List 1 Controller)orMX3112 Controller Card (List 2 Controller)

1189901L1or1189901L2

1 (2 for redundancy)

MX3 4-Port 10/100Base-T Ethernet Module (MX3ETH4) 1189902L1 1

MX3 Fan Module 1189007L1 1

MX3 Controller Blank Plug 1189005L1 1 (0 if using two controllers)

MX3 Module Blank Plug 1189006L1 1

3-6 61189901L1-1B

Section 4Installation

INTRODUCTION

CAUTIONElectronic units can be damaged by ESD. When handling units, wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent damage to elec-tronic components. Place units in antistatic packing material when transporting or storing. When working on units, always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is electrically grounded.

After unpacking the MX3112 system, inspect it for damage. If damage has occurred, file a claim with the carrier and then contact ADTRAN Customer Service. Refer to “Appendix A, Warranty” for further information. If possible, keep the original shipping container to return the MX3112 system for repair or for verification of shipping damage.

Required Components• MX3 chassis (P/N 1189001L1)

• MX3112 Controller Card (P/N 1189901L1 or P/N 1189901L2)

• MX3 4-port 10/100Base-T Ethernet module (P/N 1189902L1)

• MX3 Fan Module (P/N 1189007L1)

• Mounting brackets and screws for 19-inch or 23-inch rack installation or for wall installation

• Ground lug with nut and lock washer

• Wire-wrap post cover

• Power cover

C A U T I O N ! SUBJECT TO ELECTROSTATIC DAMAGE

OR DECREASE IN RELIABILITY.

HANDLING PRECAUTIONS REQUIRED.

61189901L1-1B 4-1


Required Tools• Phillips-head screwdriver

• Voltmeter

• Ohmmeter accurate to 0.1 ohm

INSTALLING THE MX3 CHASSISThe following sections detail the steps needed to install and power up the MX3 chassis.

InstallationThe MX3 chassis provides two options for mounting.

• “Rackmount Installation” on page 4-2

• “Wallmount Installation” on page 4-4

Use the appropriate set of instructions for the preferred application.

Rackmount InstallationFor a rackmount installation, perform the following steps:

1. Attach the mounting brackets to the side of the MX3 chassis using the two screws provided for each bracket.

• For 19-inch rack applications, adjust the bracket so that the larger side of the bracket is flush to the chassis as shown in Figure 4-1. The direction of the bracket and the set of holes used is dependent on the mounting configuration (i.e. flush mount).

• For 23-inch rack applications, adjust the bracket so that the smaller side of the bracket is flush to the chassis as shown in Figure 4-2. The direction of the bracket and the set of holes used is dependent on the mounting configuration (i.e. flush mount).

2. Use the appropriate rack-type screws to mount the chassis into the rack.

WARNINGCare should be taken to not upset the stability of the equipment rack after installation is complete.

CAUTIONThe unit must be installed in accordance with the requirements of NEC NFPA 70.

4-2 61189901L1-1B

Section 4, Installation - Installing the MX3 Chassis

Figure 4-1. 19-inch Rack Applications

Figure 4-2. 23-inch Rack Applications

A

B

FRONTBACK

A

B

FRONTBACK

61189901L1-1B 4-3


Wallmount InstallationFor a wallmount installation, perform the following steps:

1. Attach the mounting brackets to the side of the MX3 chassis using the two screws pro-vided for each bracket as shown in Figure 4-3.

CAUTIONMount the MX3 chassis over non-combustible surfaces only.

2. Position the assembly on the wall with the MX3112 system front panel facing up.

3. Use the appropriate wallmount screws to mount the chassis to the wall.

Figure 4-3. Wallmount Applications

4-4 61189901L1-1B


Power ConnectionsTo make the power connections for the MX3 chassis, perform the following steps:

1. Connect the frame ground from the frame ground lug on the rear panel of the MX3 chassis to the equipment rack grounding screw using appropriately sized wire that is at least the same gauge as the power wiring.

2. Test the frame ground connection to ensure proper ground. Using a multimeter set to the lowest resistance range, place one lead on the ground strap of the rack and the other on the chassis frame ground terminal. The reading should be less than 0.1 ohm. Readings greater than 0.1 ohm should be further investigated.

3. Make power connections to the MX3 chassis.

NOTEA readily accessible disconnect device, such as a rackmount fuse and alarm panel that is suitably approved and rated, should be incorporated into the fixed wiring.

Connect to a reliably grounded –48 VDC or ±24 VDC source which is electrically isolated from the AC source.

The branch circuit overcurrent protection should be a fuse or cir-cuit breaker rated –48 VDC, 1.5 amp slow-blow or ±24 VDC, 3 amp slow-blow.

a. Determine which fuse pairs are to supply power to the chassis.

b. Remove the fuses from the A and B slots for the pair.

c. Connect the ends of one wire between the “A” Central Office (CO) VDC supply and the PWR A terminal on the rear panel of the MX3 chassis (see Figure 4-4).

d. Connect the three remaining wires in the same manner. Connect the “A” CO VDC return with RET A; “B” CO VDC supply with PWR B; and “B” CO VDC return with RET B.

Figure 4-4. Power Connector

61189901L1-1B 4-5


4. Apply power and check voltages.

WARNINGInstalling fuses in the fuse and alarm panel at this stage provides power to the chassis. There is power to pins and connectors on the rear panel and inside the chassis. Exercise caution to avoid electrical shock.

a. Install appropriate fuses in the slots in the fuse and alarm panel that services the MX3 chassis (see Figure 4-5).

b. Using a voltmeter, place the common (normally black) lead on the RET A post of the DC power terminal block and the DC volts (normally red) lead on the PWR A post of the DC power terminal block. For a –48 VDC supply, the reading should be in the operating range of –42 VDC to –60 VDC. For a ±24 VDC supply, the reading should be in the range of ±22 VDC to ±27 VDC. Figure 4-4 illustrates the DC power connector.

c. Repeat step b for the RET/PWR B connections.

d. Remove the fuses from the fuse and alarm panel servicing the MX3 chassis.

e. Install the protective cover over the power terminal block.

Figure 4-5. Fuse and Alarm Panel

4-6 61189901L1-1B


Rear Chassis ConnectionsThe MX3 chassis rear panel is equipped with the following:

1. Four sets of BNC connectors

2. Ethernet port

3. Wire-wrap pins for alarms (critical, major, and minor)

4. Wire-wrap pins for external auxiliary inputs

5. Two 64-pin female amphenol connectors

6. Terminal strip for DC power feed (A and B)

Figure 4-6 illustrates the rear panel and identifies the equipment using the numbered list above.

Figure 4-6. MX3 Chassis Rear View

WARNINGDo not metallically connect the DS3 (A-D), T/R (DSX-1), Alarm, and Ethernet interfaces to interfaces which connect to the Outside Plant (OSP) or wiring of the OSP. These interfaces are designed for use as intra-building interfaces only. The addition of Primary Pro-tectors is not sufficient protection in order to connect these inter-faces metallically to OSP wiring.

1. The ETHERNET port is an 8-pin modular connector that provides a 10/100Base-T Ethernet interface. For system management, use CAT 5 cable to connect from the Ethernet network into the female RJ-45 port labeled ETHERNET on the MX3 chassis rear panel.

2. The DSX-3 network interfaces are full-duplex circuits provided by eight BNC coaxial cable connections. Connect the DS3 interfaces to the BNC connector labeled A as needed for the MX3112 system. Connect the receive data from the network to the IN connectors. Connect the transmit data from the MX3 chassis to the OUT connectors.

NOTEConnect DS3 interfaces using coaxial cables that have shields grounded at both ends.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

61189901L1-1B 4-7


3. The DSX-1 interfaces are 64-pin amphenol connectors. These interfaces provide Tx and Rx connections between the unit and equipment, such as wire-wrap patch panels, punch-down panels, or breakout panels. Connect the DSX-1 interfaces to the 64-pin T/R (IN) and T/R (OUT) amphenol receptacles (female). The MX3112 system uses T/R (IN)/(OUT) amphenol connectors, pins 1-12 and 33-44, for DSX-1 ports 1-12 as shown in Table 4-1.

NOTEOn the back of the chassis, prepare right exit cables to avoid conflict with the alarm/aux connections, the network management port connection, and the DS3 connections.

4. The alarm connectors connect to the three relay contacts on the main board of the MX3112 Controller Card. Connect the critical (CRIT), MAJOR, and MINOR alarm leads from the fuse and alarm panel to the Common (C), Normally Open (NO), and Normally Closed (NC) wire-wrap terminals on the MX3 chassis rear panel as required (see Figure 4-5).

5. Connect the AUX INPUTS 1–8 used by the MX3112 system for Auxiliary Alarms 1–4. These pins sense open and closed relay contacts. These pins are not polarity sensitive. Table 4-2 shows the pin assignments for the alarm inputs.

Table 4-1. Amphenol Connector Pin List

PinFunction

PinRing Tip

1 Ring 1 Tip 1 33

2 Ring 2 Tip 2 34

3 Ring 3 Tip 3 35

4 Ring 4 Tip 4 36

5 Ring 5 Tip 5 37

6 Ring 6 Tip 6 38

7 Ring 7 Tip 7 39

8 Ring 8 Tip 8 40

9 Ring 9 Tip 9 41

10 Ring 10 Tip 10 42

11 Ring 11 Tip 11 43

12 Ring 12 Tip 12 44

32 FGND FGND 64

4-8 61189901L1-1B


NOTEEach alarm input defaults to a severity level of major. The severity level can be changed on the “Environmental Alarms Menu”. Assign any alarm input to function as an alarm cut-off (ACO).

6. After steps 4 and 5 are completed, install the protective cover over the wire-wrap headers.

7. Power can now be applied to the chassis by installing appropriate fuses in the fuse and alarm panel that services the MX3 chassis.

Table 4-2. AUX Inputs 1 - 8 Pin List

AUX Inputs 1–8 Pin List

AUX Inputs Function

1, 2 Alarm 1

3, 4 Alarm 2

5, 6 Alarm 3

7, 8 Alarm 4

61189901L1-1B 4-9


INSTALLING CARDS AND MODULESThe MX3112 system is designed with hot-swappable controller cards and modules. This section provides installation procedures for the different components of the MX3112 system.

• “Installing the Fan Module” on page 10

• “Installing the MX3112 Controller Card” on page 11

• “Installing the MX3ETH4 Module” on page 12

Installing the Fan ModuleThe MX3 Fan Module mounts in the MX3 chassis (P/N 1189001L1). Follow the steps listed below to install the MX3 Fan Module. Figure 4-7 illustrates the installation of the MX3 Fan Module.

1. With the screw oriented to the left, insert the MX3 Fan Module into the MX3 chassis until the MX3 Fan Module is properly seated in the backplane.

2. Using a flat or phillips-head screwdriver, tighten the screw to secure the MX3 Fan Module to the MX3 chassis.

Figure 4-7. MX3 Fan Module Installation

4-10 61189901L1-1B

Section 4, Installation - Installing Cards and Modules

Installing the MX3112 Controller CardThe MX3112 Controller Card occupies a controller slot in the MX3 chassis. Follow the steps listed below to install the MX3112 Controller Card. Figure 4-8 illustrates the installation of the controller card.

CAUTIONThe MX3112 Controller Card must be installed in a MX3 chassis (P/N 1189001L1) with a top assembly revision of “C” or later.

1. If present, remove the blank plug from the appropriate controller slot.

WARNINGFor configurations utilizing a single MX3112 Controller Card, a blank plug (P/N 1189005L1) must be installed in the empty controller slot.

2. Open the ejector latches on the left and right sides of the front panel of the MX3112 Controller Card.

3. Gently, but firmly, slide the MX3112 Controller Card into the upper (B) or lower (A) controller slot taking note of the left and right guide grooves in the chassis. Simultaneously, apply thumb pressure on the left (on the ADTRAN logo) and right (on the part number) of the MX3112 Controller Card to ensure a good seat of the controller card pins into the backplane connector.

4. Push the ejector latches to the left/right against the front panel until they latch.

The MX3112 Controller Card initializes and begins a self-test upon insertion into an active MX3 chassis. When the self-test completes, the LEDs reflect the true state of the MX3112 Controller Card.

61189901L1-1B 4-11


Figure 4-8. MX3112 Controller Card Installation

Installing the MX3ETH4 ModuleThe MX3ETH4 module occupies expansion slot A in the MX3 chassis. Follow the steps listed to install the MX3ETH4 module. Figure 4-9 illustrates the installation of the MX3ETH4 module.

CAUTIONAlways install the MX3ETH4 module in expansion slot A of the MX3 chassis.

1. If present, remove the blank plug from expansion slot A.

WARNINGA blank plug (P/N 1189006L1) must be installed in the empty expansion slot.

2. Open the ejector latch on the left side of the MX3ETH4 module front panel.

3. Gently, but firmly, slide the MX3ETH4 module into slot A taking note of the left and right guide grooves in the chassis. Simultaneously, apply thumb pressure on the left (on the ADTRAN logo) and right (to the right of PORT 4) of the MX3ETH4 module to ensure a good seat of the MX3ETH4 module pins into the backplane connector.

4. Push the ejector latch against the front panel until it latches.

B

A

4-12 61189901L1-1B

Section 4, Installation - Installing Cards and Modules

Figure 4-9. MX3ETH4 Module Installation

Table 4-3 lists the Ethernet pin assignments for ports 1–4.

Table 4-3. Ethernet Pin Assignments for Ports 1–4

Pin Function

1 TX+

2 TX–

3 RX+

4 NC

5 NC

6 RX–

7 NC

8 NC

B

A

61189901L1-1B 4-13



4-14 61189901L1-1B

Section 5Provisioning

INTRODUCTIONThis section provides provisioning defaults for copper mode and DS3 mode and provisioning options for the flow system of the MX3112 system as follows:

• “Provisioning Defaults” on page 1

• “Flow System Provisioning” on page 5

PROVISIONING DEFAULTSTable 5-1 lists the MX3112 system default provisioning options for copper mode. Additional options are available when the Application Mode is set to DS3. Table 5-2 lists the default provisioning options for the additional DS3 options.

For detailed information on the MX3112 menus, refer to “Section 6, User Interface”.

Table 5-1. Default Provisioning Options

Provisioning Option Available Options Default Setting

Application Mode

COT/RT COT; RT RT

Copper/DS3 Copper; DS3 Copper

DS1/E1 DS1; E1 DS1

E1 Framing Unframed; PCM-30; PCM-30 with CRC; PCM-31; PCM-31 with CRC

Unframed

Auto-Provisioning Disabled; Enabled Enabled

DS1/E1 Port Interfaces

State Disabled; Enabled Enabled

Line Length (feet) 0–133; 133–266; 266–899; 399–533; 533–655; 0–6 dB (E1)

0–133

Circuit Identifier User defined DS1 Port #

61189901L1-1B 5-1


DS1/E1 Bonding

Bonding Group 1–4 Disabled

Loopback Detect Disabled; CSU; NIU; FDL; CSU + FDL; NIU + FDL

Disabled

State IS; OOS IS

DS1/E1 Timing Loop; Line; Local Loop

Bonding Groups

Skew Threshold (ms) Disabled; 1–16 ms 4

XCV Threshold Disabled; 1e-8; 1e-7; 1e-6; 1e-5; 1e-4; 1e-3

Disabled

Ethernet Client Ports

Ethernet State Disabled; Enabled Enabled

Provisioned Rate & Duplex Auto; 10, Half; 10, Full; 100, Half; 100, Full

Auto

Cross-Over Mode MDI; MDI-X; Auto Auto

Link State Awareness Disabled; Enabled Disabled

Traffic Classes

Queue Depth (packets) 1–100 50

General

Craft Port Baud Rate Auto; Disabled; 9600; 19200; 38400; 57600; 115200

Auto

Date MM/DD/YYYY N/A

Time HH:MM:SS (24 hour format) N/A

Auto-Logoff Inactivity Time Disabled; 1-Min; 5-Min; 10-Min; 15-Min; 30-Min; 45-Min; 60-Min

15-Min

System ID User defined System ID Not Set

Scheduled Card Reset MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS Disabled

Network Management

Management Mode Disabled; Local; VLAN Local

Management VLAN ID 1–4094 1

Management Port/Group Ports 1–4; Groups 1–4 Port 1

IP Address 0–255.0–255.0–255.0–255 0.0.0.0

Subnet Mask 0–255.0–255.0–255.0–255 255.255.255.0

Table 5-1. Default Provisioning Options (Continued)


5-2 61189901L1-1B

Section 5, Provisioning - Provisioning Defaults

Gateway 0–255.0–255.0–255.0–255 0.0.0.0

Provisioned Rate & Duplex Auto; 10 Mbps Half Duplex; 10 Mbps Full Duplex; 100 Mbps Half Duplex; 100 Mbps Full Duplex

Auto

Cross-Over Mode MDI; MDI-X; Auto Auto

TL1 Telnet Port 1024–65535 2000

TL1 Raw-TCP Port 1024–65535 2001

Secondary Telnet Port 1024–65535 2002

TFTP Server 0–255.0–255.0–255.0–255 0.0.0.0

SNMP

SNMP State Disabled; Enabled Disabled

SNMP Traps Disabled; Enabled Disabled

Trap Host 1 Status Valid; Under Creation; Invalid Invalid




System Location User defined SysLocation Not Set

System Contact User defined www.adtran.com

Read Community User defined public

Write Community User defined private

Test

DS1/E1 Port # Test No Test; Analog Network; Digital Line; CSU Loopback; CSU LB with Pattern; NIU Loopback; NIU LB with Pattern; Pattern Test

No Test

Alarm Relay Test Status Inactive; Active Inactive

Test Timeout Disabled; 1 minute; 5 minutes; 10 minutes; 15 minutes; 30 minutes; 45 minutes; 60 minutes

5 minutes

Pattern QRSS; ALL ONES; ALL ZEROS; 2 IN 8 (2:6); 1 IN 8 (1:7); 2^15-1 INV

QRSS



61189901L1-1B 5-3


System Alarms

Aux #1 - #4 Input Description

User defined AUX #1 - #4 INPUT, respectively

Aux #1 - #4 Input Level Disabled; Info; Alert; Minor; Major; Critical; ACO

Minor

PWR Bus A - B Input Level Disabled; Info; Alert; Minor; Major; Critical

Minor

Stand-by Controller Removed Level

Disabled; Info; Alert; Minor; Major; Critical

Minor

Alarm Chronology Ascending; Descending Ascending

Table 5-2. Additional Default Provisioning Options for DS3 Mode

Provisioning Option Available Options Default Settings

DS3 Interface

Tx Framing C-bit; M23 M23

Tx Clock Source Loop; Local Local

Loopback Detection Disabled; Enabled Enabled

DS3 Circuit Identifier User defined DS3 A

DS1 Port Interfaces

Line Coding AMI; B8ZS B8ZS

Loopback Detection Disabled; CSU; NIU Disabled

Test

DS3 Test No Test; Line Loopback; Digital Loopback; Remote Loopback; Remote ALL T1

No Test

DS1 # in DS3 Test No Test; Tributary Loopback; Remote Loopback; Remote Loopback with Pattern; CSU Loopback; CSU LB with Pattern; NIU Loopback; NIU LB with Pattern; Pattern Test

No Test



5-4 61189901L1-1B

Section 5, Provisioning - Flow System Provisioning

FLOW SYSTEM PROVISIONINGBeginning with software version D01, the MX3112 supports a new system for forwarding and classifying Ethernet traffic. The features are consistent with capabilities defined by the MEF for Ethernet Line (E-Line) services.

For a complete description of the MEF model, refer to documentation (notably MEF 10) available at the MEF web site (www.MetroEthernetForum.org).

The key components of the flow system are entities called Ethernet Virtual Connections (EVCs), maps, and bandwidth profiles. The Customer Equipment (CE) attaches at the User-Network Interface (UNI), typically through a standard 10/100/1000 Ethernet interface. The Metro Ethernet Network (MEN) is accessed through an EVC, which is typically associated with a bonding group.

Figure 5-1 shows an example of a single EVC that connects two UNI ports, with customer VLANs being conducted over the EVC. Bandwidth profiles can be applied to enforce bandwidth restrictions on traffic entering the EVC.

Figure 5-1. E-Line service using a Point-to-Point EVC

Unless otherwise specified, this document uses the term “ingress” to describe traffic from the CE that enters the MX3112 at the UNI. The term “egress” is used to describe traffic that exits the MX3112 from any interface (UNI or EVC).

MEN

UNIUNI Point-to-PointEVC

CE VLAN

CE VLAN

CE VLAN

CE VLAN

CE VLAN

CE VLAN

61189901L1-1B 5-5

http://www.MetroEthernetForum.org


EVCsAn EVC is defined by the MEF as “an association of two or more UNIs,” where a UNI is a standard 10/100/1000 Ethernet interface that is the point of demarcation between the CE and the Service Provider's MEN. In simple terms, an EVC performs two functions.

• Connects two or more subscriber sites (UNIs), enabling the transfer of Ethernet service frames between them.

• Prevents data transfer between subscriber sites that are not part of the same EVC. This capability enables an EVC to provide data privacy and security similar to a Frame Relay or ATM Permanent Virtual Circuit (PVC).

Multiple EVCs can reside on a common bonding group (or an Ethernet port). Each EVC typically has an associated EVC VLAN tag whose VLAN ID is unique among other EVCs in the MEN. The EVC VLAN tag allows the EVC to be identified and separated from other EVCs within the MEN. The EVC tag exists only within the MEN, and is not transmitted from or received at the CE.

The MEF defines E-Line services and Ethernet LAN (E-LAN) services. An E-Line service provides a point-to-point EVC that connects exactly two UNIs. An E-LAN service provides a multi-point EVC that can connect more than two UNIs. This product supports only E-Line services.

EVC AttributesThe attributes of an EVC are described in the following sections.

EVC AliasThis attribute is an arbitrary string that is used to identify the EVC within the MEN. The value must be unique across all EVCs defined in the product, and is intended for management and control purposes. The value is not carried in any field in the Ethernet frame. As an example, the Acme Service Provider might use “EVC-0001898-ACME-MEGAMART” to represent the 1898th EVC in the MEN and the customer for the EVC is MegaMart.

5-6 61189901L1-1B


EVC StatusThis attribute is a read-only status identifier of the EVC. If the value is “Running,” then the EVC is applied. Otherwise, the EVC is not applied due to a conflict. Table 5-3 lists the possible values.

EVC StateThis attribute is the user-configurable state of the EVC. Table 5-4 lists the available options.

EVC PortThis attribute is the physical interface connected to the MEN. The possible values consist of the Ethernet port(s) and bonding group(s) available on the product. In typical configurations the value is a bonding group.

EVC VLAN IDThis attribute is the VLAN ID associated with the EVC tag.

Possible values are as follows:

• 0-4095

• Transparent

In transparent mode, no EVC tag is applied.

Table 5-3. EVC Status Values

Possible Values Definition

Running Conditions are okay and the EVC provisioning is applied.

No Maps Running None of the associated maps for this EVC are running.

Invalid EVC Port The value of the EVC Port is not specified.

Invalid EVC VID The value of the EVC VID is not within the permissible range.

Duplicate EVC Another EVC exists having the same key criteria.

Disabled The State value of the EVC is provisioned as Disabled.

VLAN mgmt conflict The EVC VID conflicts with the VID that is actively used for managing the system.

Transparent EVC conflict A condition exists that violates a rule for transparent EVCs.

Table 5-4. EVC State Options

Option Definition

Enabled The EVC is in service, and the provisioning is applied if the conditions are valid.

Disabled The EVC is not in service, and the provisioning is not applied.

61189901L1-1B 5-7


CE-VLAN ID PreservationThis attribute controls whether to preserve the CE VLAN tag within the EVC. Table 5-5 lists the available options.

MapsDefine the association of customer traffic on a UNI port with an EVC by defining an entity called a map. Each map is typically associated with a single customer, and specifies param-eters including the customer VLAN ID and CoS behavior of the traffic received from the CE.

Map AttributesThe attributes of a map are described in the following sections.

Associated EVCThis attribute is the EVC associated with this map and must be specified. To discard all CE traffic on a particular map instead of forwarding it to an EVC, the EVC attribute must be set as discard.

Map AliasThis attribute is an arbitrary string that is used to identify the map. The value must be unique across all maps defined in the product, and is intended for management and control purposes. The value is not carried in any field in the Ethernet frame. As an example, the Service Provider might use “SCPOP1-Node3-Slot2-Port1” to signify Port 1 in Slot 2 of Node 3 in Santa Clara POP1. The value may have a maximum length of 32 characters.

Table 5-5. CE-VLAN ID Preservation Options

Option Definition

Enabled When this attribute is set to Enabled, the following occurs.• In the CE-to-MEN direction, the EVC tag is added as the outermost

tag, and the CE tag remains intact.• In the MEN-to-CE direction, the EVC tag is removed, and the CE

tag becomes the outermost tag.

Disabled When this attribute is set to Disabled, the following occurs.• In the CE-to-MEN direction, the outermost CE tag is removed

before the EVC tag is added.• In the MEN-to-CE direction, the EVC tag is removed. Then, if the

associated map is configured to not allow untagged and priority tagged frames, then a new CE tag is added with VLAN of the associated map. Depending on the Class of Service (CoS) attribute of the associated map(s), the P-bit value of the added CE tag will either be set explicitly or will be inherited from the EVC tag.

5-8 61189901L1-1B


Map StatusThis attribute is a read-only status identifier of the map. If the value is “Running,” then the map is applied. Otherwise, the map is not applied due to a conflict. Table 5-6 lists the possible values.

Map StateThis attribute is the user-configurable state of the map. Table 5-7 lists the options.

UNI PortThis attribute is the physical interface connected to the CE. The possible values consist of the Ethernet port(s) and bonding group(s) available on the product. In typical configurations the value is an Ethernet port.

Table 5-6. Map Status Values

Possible Value Definition

Running Conditions are okay and the map provisioning is applied.

No EVC connected The associated EVC is not specified.

EVC not running The associated EVC is specified, but the status of the EVC is not “Running.”

Invalid UNI port The UNI Port is not specified.

Disabled The State value of the map is provisioned as Disabled.

Duplicate Map Another map exists having conflicting ingress criteria.

VLAN mgmt conflict The CE VLAN ID conflicts with the VID that is actively used for managing the system.

Tag option conflict A conflict is present that involves the option for allowing untagged and priority tagged traffic to be received at the UNI Port.

Excess UNIs per EVC Another map having a different UNI port is connected to the same EVC.

UNI Port = EVC Port The UNI port equals the same port as the associated EVC.

Preserve conflict A conflict is present in combination with the CE VLAN ID Preservation attribute of the associated EVC.

Resources unavailable The internal resources needed to apply the map are not available.

Table 5-7. Map State Options

Option Definition

Enabled The map is in service, and the provisioning is applied if the conditions are valid.

Disabled The map is not in service, and the provisioning is not applied.

61189901L1-1B 5-9


CE VLAN IDThis attribute is the VLAN ID of the outermost VLAN tag of the Ethernet frame received at the UNI port. If the value is unspecified, then the map applies to the remainder of customer frames received at the UNI port that are not affected by other maps on the same UNI port.


• 0-4094

• Unspecified

CE VLAN P-bitsThis attribute is a range of P-bit values of the outermost VLAN tag of the Ethernet frame received at the UNI port. The value is entered as a character string of the allowable P-bit values. Examples of possible values are as follows:

• Unspecified

• 0,1,2 = P-bit values 0, 1, 2

• 0-2,5-7 = P-bit values 0, 1, 2, 5, 6, 7

This attribute can only be specified if both of the following conditions are true.

• The CE VLAN ID attribute is specified.

• The DSCP value attribute is not specified.

DSCP valueThis attribute is the DSCP value of the Ethernet frame received at the UNI port.


• 0-63

• Unspecified

This attribute can only be specified if both of the following conditions are true.

• The CE VLAN ID attribute is specified.

• The CE VLAN P-bits attribute is not specified.

Untagged and Priority Tagged FramesThis attribute controls whether untagged and priority tagged frames are allowed to ingress the UNI port in addition to frames tagged with the specified CE VLAN ID. Table 5-8 lists the options.

If the CE VLAN ID attribute is not specified, then this attribute is not meaningful.

Table 5-8. Untagged and Priority Tagged Frame Options

Option Definition

Allow Untagged and priority-tagged frames are allowed at the UNI port.

Disallow Untagged and priority-tagged frames are discarded at the UNI port.

5-10 61189901L1-1B


Class of ServiceThis attribute controls how frames associated with the map are prioritized into the EVC. The CoS for a given customer frame can be explicitly assigned or it can be inherited from the CE VLAN P-bit value. This attribute governs both the prioritization of the frame within the system and the P-bit value of the EVC tag (if present).


• Inherit from CE VLAN P-bits

• Explicit 7 (NC)

• Explicit 6 (VO)

• Explicit 5 (VI)

• Explicit 4 (CL)

• Explicit 3 (EE)

• Explicit 0 (BE)

• Explicit 2

• Explicit 1 (BK)

If this attribute's value is an explicit value, the CoS associated with the value is weighted in the order shown above, where 7 is the highest priority and 1 is the lowest priority (per IEEE 802.1D-2004).

Notes regarding the P-bit value of the EVC tag:

• When maps are configured to inherit CoS from the CE VLAN tag, then the P-bit value of the associated EVC tag will also be inherited from the CE VLAN tag.

• When maps are configured for explicit CoS, then ideally the P-bit value of the EVC tag for associated frames would always be set to that CoS value. However, there is currently a limitation. If more than one map is applied to an EVC, and more than one map is set for explicit CoS, then the associated frames will be classified accordingly, but the P-bit value of the EVC tag will always equal the highest explicit CoS value of the associated maps.

ProfileThis attribute displays the profile, if any, that is applied to the map.

61189901L1-1B 5-11


Example #1: Two CE VLANs Mapped to Two EVCsFigure 5-2 illustrates an example of two customer VLANs that ingress the system on a common UNI port, and map to two different EVCs. Customer VLAN 1 is mapped to the EVC having VID 101, and customer VLAN 2 is mapped to the EVC having VID 102. Both EVCs could reside on the same physical interface (typically a bonding group), or they could reside on two different interfaces.

Figure 5-2. E-Line service using two Point-to-Point EVCs

Figure 5-3 provides a more detailed view of the mapping of the customer VLANs into the EVCs in the CE-to-MEN direction. For this example, both EVCs reside on the same bonding group, and the CoS for each received customer frame is inherited from the P-bit value of the outermost customer VLAN tag. The following provisioning would apply on each system.

• EVC #1: Port = Group 1, VID=101, CE VLAN ID Preservation = Enabled


• Map #1: UNI Port = Ethernet 1, CE VLAN ID = 1, EVC = EVC #1, Class of Service = Inherit


Figure 5-3. E-Line service using two Point-to-Point EVCs

UNI

CE VLAN 1

CE VLAN 2

MEN

UNI

CE VLAN 1

CE VLAN 2

EVC #1, VID = 101

EVC #2, VID = 102

UNI

P-bit 6

P-bit 7

CE VLAN ID 1

P-bit 6

P-bit 7

CE VLAN ID 2

CoS 7

CoS 6

CoS 7EVC #2VID 102

EVC #1VID 101

Bonding Group

Metro EthernetNetwork Interface

CustomerInterface

Link #1

Link #n

Link #2

Link #3

CoS 6

5-12 61189901L1-1B


Example #2: Two CE VLANs Mapped to One EVCFigure 5-4 illustrates an example of two customer VLANs that ingress the system on a common UNI port, and map to a common EVC. Customer VLANs 1 and 2 are mapped to an EVC with VID 101.


Figure 5-5 provides a more detailed view of the mapping of the customer VLANs into the EVC in the CE-to-MEN direction. For this example, the CoS for each received customer frame is inherited from the P-bit value of the outermost customer VLAN tag. The following provisioning would apply on each system.





UNI

CE VLAN 1

CE VLAN 2

MEN

UNI

CE VLAN 1

CE VLAN 2

EVC #1, VID = 101

UNI

P-bit 6

P-bit 7

CE VLAN ID 1

P-bit 6

P-bit 7

CE VLAN ID 2

CustomerInterface

CoS 7

CoS 6 EVC #1VID 101 Bonding

Group

Metro EthernetNetwork Interface

Link #1

Link #n

Link #2

Link #3

61189901L1-1B 5-13


Bandwidth ProfilesA bandwidth profile (or profile) is a method of characterizing Service Frames for the purpose of rate policing. A bandwidth profile can be applied in one of the following ways:

• Ingress bandwidth profile per ingress UNI

• Ingress bandwidth profile per EVC

• Ingress bandwidth profile per CoS identifier on an EVC

• Ingress bandwidth profile customized on a per map basis

In typical applications, the bandwidth available on the EVC is less than the bandwidth available at the UNI port. The bandwidth bottleneck is typically only in the CE-to-MEN direction. Therefore, all bandwidth profiles are applied only for traffic conducted in the CE-to-MEN direction. Profiles are not applied to the traffic conducted in the MEN-to-CE direction.

Bandwidth Profile AttributesThe attributes of a profile are described in the following sections.

Profile AliasThis attribute is an arbitrary string that is used to identify the profile. The value must be unique across all profiles defined in the product, and is intended for management and control purposes. The value is not carried in any field in the Ethernet frame. The value can have a maximum length of 32 characters.

Profile StatusThis attribute is a read-only status identifier of the profile. If the value is “Running,” then the profile is applied. Otherwise, the profile is not applied due to a conflict. Table 5-9 lists the possible values.

Table 5-9. Profile Status Values


Running Conditions are okay and the profile provisioning is applied.

Invalid UNI Port The UNI Port of the profile is needed for the Application, but it is not specified.

Disabled The State value of the profile is provisioned as Disabled.

Invalid EVC The EVC of the profile is needed for the Application, but it is not specified.

Duplicate Profile Another profile exists having equal (or conflicting) values for the Application.

Invalid Rate(s) The values for CIR and/or EIR conflict in relation to the Rate Coupling value.

5-14 61189901L1-1B


Profile StateThis attribute is the user-configurable state of the profile. Table 5-10 lists the options.

ApplicationThis attribute controls how the profile is applied. Table 5-11 lists the options.

UNI port of profileThis attribute is available and meaningful only if the Application is UNI port. The possible options consist of the Ethernet port(s) and bonding group(s) available on the product.

EVC of profileThis attribute is available and meaningful only if the Application is “EVC” or “CE-VLAN CoS.” The value is the alias of the associated EVC.

Invalid Application The Application attribute is not specified.

Invalid CoS The CoS of the profile is needed for the Application, but the value is invalid.

Map conflict A condition exists in which a map is applied to more than one profile.

Table 5-10. Profile State Options

Option Definition

Enabled The profile is in service, and the provisioning is applied if the conditions are valid.

Disabled The profile is not in service, and the provisioning is not applied.

Table 5-11. Application Options

Option Definition

Not Applied The profile is not applied.

UNI port The profile is applied to all maps of a specific UNI port.

EVC The profile is applied to all maps associated with a specific EVC.

CE-VLAN CoS The profile is applied to a set of CoS values for a given EVC.

Custom The profile is explicitly applied to one or more maps.

Table 5-9. Profile Status Values (Continued)


61189901L1-1B 5-15


CoS value(s) of profileThis attribute is available and meaningful only if the Application is “CE-VLAN CoS.”

Examples of possible values:

• Empty string = Unspecified

• 0,1,2 = CoS values 0, 1, 2

• 0-2,5-7 = CoS values 0, 1, 2, 5, 6, 7

Rate CouplingThis attribute controls the relationship of the EIR to the CIR. Table 5-12 lists the options.

CIRThe CIR is the rate up to which service frames are delivered according to the service perfor-mance objectives.

CBSThe CBS is the maximum available bytes for a burst of ingress traffic sent at the UNI speed while still conforming to the CIR.

EIRThe EIR is the rate up to which service frames are delivered without any performance objectives.

EBSThe EBS is the maximum available bytes for a burst of ingress traffic sent at the UNI speed while still conforming to the EIR.

Table 5-12. Rate Coupling Options

Option Definition

Enabled The EIR value is additive to the CIR.

Disabled The EIR is inclusive of the CIR, and therefore must be greater than or equal to the CIR.

5-16 61189901L1-1B


Example #1: Ingress Bandwidth Profile per UNIA single bandwidth profile can be applied to all ingress frames at a designated UNI. This type of profile manages bandwidth non-discriminatively for all EVCs that are associated with the UNI. Depending on the configuration and traffic conditions during periods of congestion, if multiple EVCs are associated with the UNI, then some of those EVCs may get more bandwidth while others may get less bandwidth.

Consider the conditions of “Example #1: Two CE VLANs Mapped to Two EVCs” on page 5-12, where traffic for two customer VLANs is received at the same UNI port, and mapped to two different EVCs.

The following profile would collectively apply to all frames that ingress at Ethernet 1 (i.e., the two customer VLANs).

Profile #1:• Application = UNI Port

• UNI Port of Profile = Ethernet 1

• Rate Coupling = Disabled

• Committed Information Rate = 2000 kbps

• Committed Burst Size = 3125 bytes

• Excess Information Rate = 3000 kbps

• Excess Burst Size = 12500 bytes

Profile #1 is applied to ingress traffic of both Map #1 and Map #2 because these maps have Ethernet 1 defined as the UNI Port.

61189901L1-1B 5-17


Example #2: Ingress Bandwidth Profile per EVCA single bandwidth profile can be applied to all ingress frames that are mapped to a desig-nated EVC. Thus, if traffic is mapped from a UNI to two EVCs, then one profile could be defined for each EVC.

Consider the conditions of “Example #1: Two CE VLANs Mapped to Two EVCs” on page 5-12, where two customer VLANs are received at the same UNI port, and mapped to two different EVCs.

The following profiles would apply to the respective EVC:

Profile #1:• Application = EVC

• EVC of Profile = EVC #1






Profile #2:• Application = EVC







Profile #1 is applied to ingress traffic of Map #1 because this map is associated with EVC #1.

Profile #2 is applied to ingress traffic of Map #2 because this map is associated with EVC #2.

5-18 61189901L1-1B


Example #3: Ingress Bandwidth Profile per Class of Service Identifier on an EVCA single bandwidth profile can be applied to all ingress frames having a designated CoS.

Consider the conditions similar to “Example #2: Two CE VLANs Mapped to One EVC” on page 5-13, where two customer VLANs are received at the same UNI port, and mapped to a common EVC. To ensure bandwidth for high priority traffic, separate profiles can be applied to specific values (or ranges of values) of CoS for the EVC.

The EVC is defined as follows:

EVC #1:• Port = Group 1

• VID=101

Four maps are defined as follows:

Map #1:• UNI Port = Ethernet 1

• CE VLAN ID = 1

• CE VLAN P-bits = 5-7

• EVC = EVC #1

• Class of Service = Inherit


• CE VLAN ID = 1


• EVC = EVC #1



• CE VLAN ID = 2


• EVC = EVC #1



• CE VLAN ID = 2


• EVC = EVC #1


61189901L1-1B 5-19


Two profiles are defined as follows, one for high priority traffic and the other for low priority traffic.

Profile #1:• Application = CoS


• CoS value(s) of profile = 5-7


• CIR = 1000 kbps

• CBS = 3125 bytes

• EIR = 4000 kbps

• EBS = 12500 bytes

Profile #2:• Application = CoS


• CoS value(s) of profile = 0-4


• CIR = 3000 kbps


• EIR = 4000 kbps

• EBS = 12500 byte

Note that each map is configured such that the CoS for a given ingress frame is inherited from the P-bit value of the customer VLAN tag.

Profile #1 is applied to ingress traffic of both Map #1 and Map #3 because they map customer traffic having P-bits 5-7 into EVC #1.

Profile #2 is applied to ingress traffic of both Map #2 and Map #4 because they map customer traffic having P-bits 0-4 into EVC #1.

NOTEFor this type of profile, it is necessary for each associated map to have the CE VLAN P-bit attribute defined with a value (or range of values) that corresponds with the CoS value(s) of the profile.

5-20 61189901L1-1B


Example #4: Ingress Bandwidth Profile per CustomA single bandwidth profile can be applied to ingress frames of a particular map or set of maps. Use this Application of the bandwidth profile to limit traffic on ingress frames without having to specify the UNI, EVC, or PRI. The custom profile makes it possible to limit traffic on maps that have CE-VLANs as the criteria. It also allows implementing different profiles on maps that have common map criteria (for example, all go to the same EVC) but are not duplicate maps.

Consider the conditions of “Example #2: Two CE VLANs Mapped to One EVC” on page 5-13 where two CE-VLANs are received at the same UNI port and mapped to the same EVC. In order to enforce a different bandwidth profile for each CE-VLAN, apply separate custom profiles to each map.

The following profiles can apply to the respective maps.

Profile #1• CIR/EIR Coupling = Disabled

• CIR = 1000 kbps

• EIR = 2000 kbps



• Mode = Custom

• Connected = Map #1

Profile #2• CIR/EIR Coupling = Disabled

• CIR = 2000 kbps

• EIR = 3000 kbps



• Mode = Custom

• Connected = Map #2

Profile #1 is applied to the ingress traffic of Map #1, which is CE-VLAN 1.

Profile #2 is applied to the ingress traffic of Map #2, which is CE-VLAN 2.

61189901L1-1B 5-21


Rules for Provisioning Maps, EVCs, and ProfilesTo ensure valid provisioning, the rules below are enforced for maps, EVCs, and profiles. In most cases the value of the Status attribute for an entity provides a brief description of the condition.

1. A map, EVC, or profile is applied only if the respective status is “Running,” which indi-cates that the conditions are valid.

2. Two maps are considered to be duplicate if they both have the same values for the following attributes:

• UNI Port• CE VLAN ID• Overlapping range for CE VLAN P-bits• DSCP value• Untagged, Priority Tagged Frames

3. Two EVCs are considered to be duplicate if they both have the same values for the following attributes:

• EVC Port• EVC VLAN ID

4. Two profiles are considered to be duplicate if they both have the same values for the following attributes:

• Application• UNI Port of Profile• EVC of Profile• Overlapping range for CoS value(s) of Profile

5. No two maps may have the same alias value.

6. No two EVCs may have the same alias value.

7. No two profiles may have the same alias value.

8. If the system is managed via a VLAN on a designated bonding group or Ethernet port, then the management VID value may not equal either the CE VLAN ID value of a map or the EVC VID value of an EVC.

9. If the CE VLAN ID Preservation attribute of an EVC is disabled, then all of the associated maps must have the same value of the CE VLAN ID attribute.

10. When multiple maps are applied to a common EVC, each map must have the same UNI port. Multiple UNI ports may not be mapped to a common EVC.

11. If an EVC is provisioned to be transparent, then it must be the only EVC having the same EVC Port.

12. If two maps have either the same UNI Port or the same associated EVC, then only one of the maps may be provisioned to allow untagged and priority tagged frames.

13. If the Rate Coupling attribute is disabled, then the Committed Information Rate may not exceed the Excess Information Rate.

14. To ensure that a given Ethernet frame is not governed by more than one profile, no two maps may apply to the same profile.

5-22 61189901L1-1B

Section 6User Interface

INTRODUCTIONThis section provides detailed information on the following:

• “System Management” on page 6-1

• “Network Management” on page 6-4

• “Logging on to the MX3112 System” on page 6-11

• “Menu Structure” on page 6-12

• “Menu Navigation” on page 6-13

• “Menu Trees” on page 6-14

• “Menu Descriptions” on page 6-51

SYSTEM MANAGEMENTMX3112 system management and provisioning is facilitated by a series of intuitive menus that are accessible on a computer screen. The MX3112 system provides two methods for management access.

• “Craft Interface” on page 6-1

• “Remote Menu (DS1 Mode Only)” on page 6-2

Craft InterfaceConnect to the MX3112 system menus through the DB-9 connector, labeled CRAFT, on the front of the MX3112 Controller Card (see Figure 6-1). A DB-9 straight-through cable is required.

Figure 6-1. Craft Connection

B

A

Craft Connection

61189901L1-1B 6-1


Most personal computers or laptops can run communications software that emulates a VT100 terminal. Windows programs such as Terminal or HyperTerminal are two such examples in the Windows format, but there are many other adequate, commercially available software packages, virtually all of which allow the PC or laptop to emulate a VT100 terminal. Certain configuration items must be set on a PC or laptop to act as a VT100 terminal for the MX3112 system.

1. Set the parameters of the communications software to the following settings:

• 115200 baud rate or less

• 8 data bits

• No parity

• 1 stop bit

• No flow control

2. Set the PC for direct connect on the appropriate communications port (as opposed to dial up connection).

3. Plug the male end of the data cable into the MX3112 Controller Card. Make connection to the PC or laptop as appropriate for the equipment.

Remote Menu (DS1 Mode Only)The MX3112 system allows remote operation by remotely opening a VT100 menu session to a far end RT system from within a menu session of an associated near end COT system. The COT system, in this case, can be an OPTI-6100 GEFM module or a MX3112 system. The menu access to the RT system is available regardless of how the management mode option is provisioned. Establish a remote menu session to the RT system via the Remote Management menu of the COT system (see Figure 6-2). Refer to the “Remote Management Menu (DS1 Mode Only)” on page 6-222 for more details.

6-2 61189901L1-1B

Section 6, User Interface - System Management

Figure 6-2. Remote Management Menu

Card: Controller A ADTRAN MX3112 System MM/DD/YY hh:mm

Unacknowledged Alarms: NONE ID: Site 1 MX3112

MX3112->Remote Menu Access

1 - MX3112 REMOTE [Critical]

Selection : '?' - System Help Screen

61189901L1-1B 6-3


NETWORK MANAGEMENTThe MX3112 system supports a management mode option (see Figure 6-3) that controls the interface from which Ethernet connectivity is established for managing the system. This option has the following possible settings:

• Disabled: The system cannot be managed via Ethernet. Management connectivity is supported only via craft interface and the dedicated COT-RT menu channel (remote unit only). The chassis Ethernet port is disabled.

• Local: Management connectivity is supported via the craft interface, the dedicated COT-RT menu channel (remote unit only), or via Ethernet from the chassis 10/100 Ethernet port.

• VLAN: Management connectivity is supported via craft interface, the dedicated COT-RT menu channel (remote unit only), or via Ethernet from a VLAN on a designated bonding group or a customer 10/100 port. The chassis Ethernet port is disabled.

The default value for the management mode is local. When the management mode is set for VLAN, the unit must be provisioned with a valid IP address, gateway address, and subnet mask as would normally be required when the system is managed via the chassis Ethernet port (management mode = local). Examples of VLAN-based management start on page 6-8.

Some restrictions are enforced to guarantee that the VLAN designated for management does not conflict with customer Ethernet traffic having the same VLAN ID.

• No running maps or EVCs can exist in which either the CE VLAN VID or the EVC VID equals the provisioned management VLAN ID.

Network Management MenusThe management mode option is available within the Quick Setup menu (see Figure 6-3).

Figure 6-3. Quick Setup Menu



MX3112->Quick Setup

Application Mode DS1 Port Bonding Group

1 - COT/RT : RT 13 - 1 1

2 - Copper/DS3 : Copper 14 - 2 1

3 - Auto-Provisioning : Enabled 15 - 3 1

16 - 4 2

Ethernet Client Ports 17 - 5 2

4 - Select Ethernet Client Ports 18 - 6 2

5 - Packet Flows 19 - 7 3

20 - 8 3

System 21 - 9 3

6 - Management Mode : VLAN 1, Group 1 22 - 10 4

7 - IP Address : 10.100.51.95 23 - 11 4

8 - Subnet Mask : 255.255.255.0 24 - 12 4

9 - Gateway : 10.100.51.254

10 - Date : 01/01/2005

11 - Time : 12:00:00

12 - System ID : Site 1 MX3112


6-4 61189901L1-1B

Section 6, User Interface - Network Management

Selecting the management mode option navigates to the Management Mode menu (see Figure 6-4) where three options are presented:

• Management Mode

• Management VLAN/ID

• Management Port/Group

The management VLAN ID and the management port/group options are meaningful only when the management mode option is provisioned to VLAN.

Figure 6-4. Management Mode Menu



MX3112->Quick Setup->Management Mode

1 - Management Mode : VLAN

Options for VLAN Management

2 - Management VLAN ID : 501

3 - Management Port/Group : Group 1

The Management VID may not equal any active map CE VID or EVC VID


61189901L1-1B 6-5


Figure 6-5 illustrates the Management Mode Selection menu. Selecting the VLAN option is restricted if the provisioned management VLAN ID value conflicts with any existing flows.

Figure 6-5. Management Mode Selection Menu

Figure 6-6 illustrates the Management VLAN ID menu. When the management mode option is set for VLAN, entering a value that conflicts with any existing flows is restricted. The value range is 1–4094.

Figure 6-6. Management VLAN ID Menu



Management Mode : VLAN

1 - Disabled

2 - Local

3 - VLAN





Management VLAN ID : 501

Enter Management VLAN ID:


'?' - System Help Screen

6-6 61189901L1-1B


Figure 6-6 illustrates the Management Port/Group menu. The VLAN management interface can be either a bonding group or a customer 10/100 port.

Figure 6-7. Management Port/Group Menu



Management Port/Group : Group 1

1 - Port 1

2 - Port 2

3 - Port 3

4 - Port 4

5 - Group 1

6 - Group 2

7 - Group 3

8 - Group 4


61189901L1-1B 6-7


Example 1Figure 6-8 illustrates how a remote MX3112 system can be managed by VLAN 501 through a single GEFM. The GEFM is provisioned to route the VLAN between the Gigabit Ethernet port and the bonding group, treating it similarly to any other customer data. To guarantee suffi-cient Class of Service (CoS) on the management VLAN, it is recommended that the GEFM employ available methods to assign this VLAN sufficient bandwidth and CoS relative to other traffic.

The management mode option of the remote MX3112 system is VLAN.

Figure 6-8. VLAN-Based Management of a Remote MX3112 through a GEFM

10/100 10/100

V101

V501Bonding

Group(n x DS1)

GigE

V501ROUTER

V101

V101

6-8 61189901L1-1B


Example 2Figure 6-9 illustrates how a remote MX3112 system can be managed by VLAN 501 through two separate GEFM modules. The two GEFM modules can reside in the same OPTI-6100 system or the two modules can reside in separate systems. A bonding group of one or more DS1s is used to route the traffic between the two GEFM modules. Each GEFM is provisioned to route this VLAN between the Gigabit Ethernet port and the bonding groups treating it similarly to any other customer data. To guarantee sufficient CoS on the management VLAN, it is recommended that the GEFM employ available methods to assign this VLAN sufficient bandwidth and CoS relative to other traffic.

The management mode option of the remote MX3112 system is VLAN.

Figure 6-9. VLAN-Based Management of a Remote MX3112 through Two GEFMs

10/100 10/100

V101

V101

V501

V501

BondingGroup

(n x DS1)

BondingGroup

(n x DS1)

GigE

V501

GigE

V501ROUTER

61189901L1-1B 6-9


Example 3Figure 6-10 illustrates how two MX3112 systems can be managed by two separate VLANs, VIDs 501 and 502. The COT MX3112 system is provisioned to route VLAN 501 between one of the client 10/100 Ethernet ports and one of the bonding groups treating this VLAN similarly to any other customer data. To guarantee sufficient CoS for VLAN 501, it is recommended that the COT MX3112 employ available methods to assign this VLAN sufficient bandwidth and CoS relative to other traffic.

The management mode option for both MX3112 systems is VLAN.

Figure 6-10. VLAN-Based Management of Local and Remote MX3112s

ROUTER

V501Bonding

Group(n x DS1)

V501

V502

V502

10/100channel

Client 10/100Channels

Client 10/100

Channel

6-10 61189901L1-1B

Section 6, User Interface - Logging on to the MX3112 System

LOGGING ON TO THE MX3112 SYSTEMTo log on to the MX3112 system, perform the following steps:

1. Establish the physical connection to the MX3112 system using one of the options dis-cussed in “System Management” on page 6-1.

2. If a craft port session is being used, proceed to step 3. If using a Telnet menu session proceed to step 4.

3. Press ENTER until the logon prompt appears.

NOTEThe MX3112 system requires the user ID and associated password.

4. Enter the default user ID, “ADMIN” (or the configured logon name with System Administrator privileges), and press ENTER.

5. Enter the default password, “PASSWORD” (or the configured password), and press ENTER.

NOTELogon name and password fields are case sensitive. The default values are all uppercase.

NOTEIf your username and/or password are forgotten, Adtran Tech Support can assist with logon.

61189901L1-1B 6-11


MENU STRUCTUREThe MX3112 Controller Card provides a menu system for the entire MX3112 system. All system-related menus are controlled by the MX3112 Controller Card. This subsection explains the methods used to navigate the MX3112 system menus.

NOTETo view the MX3112 system menu trees, refer to “Menu Trees” on page 6-14.

The menu structure for the MX3112 system is a layered menu tree. Each layer of the menu tree is displayed as a menu or a screen.

MenuA menu is a display that provides numbered selections that are used to navigate to related menus, modify provisioning information, or display information screens. A menu can contain the following objects:

• Menu Option: A menu option is indicated by a number, which when selected navigates the display to another menu layer or is used to change the option setting.

• Read-only Field: A read-only field displays information that cannot be changed. The information displayed in a read-only field can be static or can be automatically updated by the MX3112 system.

• Read-write Field: A read-write field displays information that when selected can be modified.

• Keyboard Commands: A hot key is a key or combination of keys that are assigned to a function (see Table 6-1). Hot keys are indicated by the required key(s) and a brief description (i.e., CTRL+A - acknowledge all alarms).

ScreenA screen is a display that usually indicates the end of a menu tree path. A screen can contain the following objects:

• Read-only Field: A read-only field displays information that cannot be changed. The information displayed in a read-only field can be static or can be automatically updated by the MX3112 system.

• Read-write Field: A read-write field displays information that when selected can be modified.

• Keyboard Commands: A hot key is a key or combination of keys that are assigned to a function (see Table 6-1). Hot keys are indicated by the required key(s) and a brief description (i.e., CTRL+A - acknowledge all alarms).

6-12 61189901L1-1B

Section 6, User Interface - Menu Navigation

MENU NAVIGATIONBasic menu navigation is accomplished by selecting the desired option number and then pressing ENTER. To work backward through the menus press the ESC (escape) key. To access the System Help screen, press the question mark (?) key.

Table 6-1 displays the general keyboard commands for the MX3112 system. The System Help screen can be accessed from any MX3112 screen or menu by pressing “?”.

Table 6-1. MX3112 Keyboard Commands

Keyboard Command Description

BACKSPACE This keyboard command is used to delete the character to left of the cursor during keyboard input.

ENTER (or Return) This keyboard command is used to terminate input.

ESC (Escape) This keyboard command is used to back up to the previous menu and used to clear prompts.

CTRL+A (Control and a) This keyboard command is used to acknowledge all alarms

CTRL+C/D (Control and c or d) This keyboard command is used to logout and disconnect.

CTRL+R (Control and r) This keyboard command is used to refresh the display.

CTRL+Z (Control and z) This keyboard command is used to exit from module menus.

61189901L1-1B 6-13


MENU TREESThis subsection provides a detailed set of menu trees for the MX3112 system. The menu trees are maps that can be used to locate provisioning options with ease. Some of the menu trees span multiple pages, signified by the “(continued)” at the end of the illustration title.

The MX3112 system menu trees are divided by two Application Modes:

• “Copper Mode” on page 6-15

– “Provisioning Menu Trees - Copper Mode” on page 6-16

- “Network Management Menu Tree - Copper Mode” on page 6-22

– “Quick Setup Menu Tree - Copper Mode” on page 6-23

– “Status and Test Menu Trees - Copper Mode” on page 6-24

– “Performance Monitoring Menu Tree - Copper Mode” on page 6-25

- “DS1 Port Statistics Menu Tree - Copper Mode” on page 6-26

- “DS1 Bonding Statistics Menu Tree - Copper Mode” on page 6-27

- “Bonding Group Statistics Menu Tree - Copper Mode” on page 6-28

- “Ethernet Client Statistics Menu Tree - Copper Mode” on page 6-29

– “System Alarms and Firmware Upgrade Menu Trees - Copper Mode” on page 6-30

• “DS3 Mode” on page 6-31

– “Provisioning Menu Trees - DS3 Mode” on page 6-32

- “Network Management Menu Tree - DS3 Mode” on page 6-39

– “Quick Setup Menu Tree - DS3 Mode” on page 6-40

– “Status and Test Menu Trees - DS3 Mode” on page 6-41

– “Performance Monitoring Menu Tree - DS3 Mode” on page 6-43

- “DS3 Statistics Menu Tree - DS3 Mode” on page 6-44

- “DS1 Port Statistics Menu Tree - DS3 Mode” on page 6-46

- “DS1 Bonding Statistics Menu Tree - DS3 Mode” on page 6-47

- “Bonding Group Statistics Menu Tree - DS3 Mode” on page 6-48

- “Ethernet Client Statistics Menu Tree - DS3 Mode” on page 6-49

– “System Alarms and Firmware Upgrade Menu Trees - DS3 Mode” on page 6-50

6-14 61189901L1-1B

Section 6, User Interface - Menu Trees

Copper Mode

Figure 6-11. MX3112 Main Menu Tree - Copper Mode

MX3112 Main Menu

1. Configuration

2. Provisioning

3. Quick Setup

4. Status

5. Test

8. Remote Management

9. or 10. Logout 2

A

B

C

D

7. System AlarmsF

8. or 9. Firmware Upgrade 1G

6. Performance MonitoringE

12

Denotes that this item only appears when COT is selected in the Application Mode.Appears as option 8 if RT is selected in the Application Mode and as option 9 if COT is selected in the Application Mode.Appears as option 9 if RT is selected in the Application Mode and as option 10 if COT is selected in the Application Mode.

Controller A/B

CLEI Code

Part Number

Serial Number

MAC Address

Product Revision

Code Version

Code Checksum

Boot Version

Boot Checksum

61189901L1-1B 6-15


Figure 6-12. Provisioning Menu Trees - Copper Mode

A

1. Application Mode

H

2. DS1 Port Interfaces

1. - 12. DS1 Port 1 - 12

13. Copy Provisioning to Multiple

1. State

2. Line Length (feet)

3. Circuit Identifier

1. Disabled

2. Enabled

1. 0-133

2. 133-266

3. 266-399

4. 399-533

5. 533-655

1. Copy FROM DS1 Port

Line Length (feet)

Loopback Detection

2. First DS1 Port to Copy TO

3. Last DS1 Port to Copy TO

4. Copy Provisioning

State

1. COT/RT

2. Copper/DS3

4. Auto-Provisioning 1

1. COT

2. RT

1. Copper

2. DS3

1. Disabled

2. Enabled

3. DS1/E11. DS1

2. E1

4. E1 Framing Mode 21. PCM-30

5. Unframed

2. PCM-30 w/CRC

3. PCM-31

4. PCM-31 w/CRC

12

Appears as option 4 if RT and DS1 is selected in the Application Mode.Appears as option 4 if E1 is selected in the Application Mode.

6-16 61189901L1-1B


Figure 6-12. Provisioning Menu Trees - Copper Mode (Continued)

H

3. DS1 Bonding

1. - 12. DS1 Port 1 - 12

13. DS1 Timing

1. Bonding Group

2. Loopback Detect1. Disabled

2. CSU

3. NIU

4. FDL

5. CSU + FDL

6. NIU + FDL

1. Loop

2. Line

3. Local

I

4. Bonding Groups1. - 4. Bonding Group 1 - 4

1. Skew Threshold (ms)

2. XCV Threshold1. Disabled

2. 1e-8

3. 1e-7

4. 1e-6

5. 1e-5

6. 1e-4

7. 1e-3

3. State1. IS

2. OOS

1. DS1 Timing Mode

14. Link Identifiers

1. - 12. DS1 Port 1 - 12

13. Set ALL Expected Link IDs equal to Received Link IDs


1. Sent Link ID

Received Link ID

2. Expected Link ID

3. Set Expected Equal to Received

1. No Action

2. Alarm Only

3. Alarm + Link Drop

3. Remote Auto-Provisioned Group

Denotes that this item only appears when COT is selected in the Application Mode.

61189901L1-1B 6-17



5. Explicit 4 (CL)

6. Explicit 5 (VI)

I

J

5. Packet Flows

1. EVCs

2. Maps

1. Add EVC11. EVC Alias

EVC Status

2. EVC State

3. EVC Port

4. EVC VLAN ID

5. CE VLAN ID Preservation

6. Maps for this EVC

7. Delete this EVC

1. Disabled

2. Enabled

1.–4. Ethernet 1–4

5.–8. Group 1–4

9. Unspecified

1. Disabled

2. Enabled

1. Add Map11. Associated EVC

2. Map Alias

Map Status

3. Map State

4. UNI Port

5. CE VLAN ID

6. CE VLAN P-bits2

7. DSCP value2

8. Untagged, Priority Tagged Frames2

9. Class of Service

10. Delete this Map

1. Disabled

2. Enabled

1. Disallow

2. Allow

1. Explicit 0 (BE)

2. Explicit 1 (BK)

3. Explicit 2

4. Explicit 3 (EE)

7. Explicit 6 (VO)

8. Explicit 7 (NC)

9. Inherit from CE VLAN P-bits


5.–8. Group 1–4

9. Unspecified

1 This option number increases or decreases by one as each flow is added or deleted.2 This option is available only when a CE VLAN ID is specified.

K

6-18 61189901L1-1B



3. Profiles

4. Pre-defined flows

5. Delete all flows

6. Egress Queue Depths

1. Add Profile11. Profile Alias

Profile Status

2. Profile State

3. Application

4. UNI port of profile or EVC of profile2

5. CoS value(s) of profile3

6. Rate Coupling

7. Committed Information Rate (kbps)

8. Committed Burst Size (bytes)

9. Excess Information Rate (kbps)

10. Excess Burst Size (bytes)

11. Maps for this profile

12. Delete this profile

1 This option number increases or decreases by one as each flow is added or deleted.

1. Disabled

2. Enabled

1. Unspecified

2. UNI port

3. EVC

CE-VLAN CoS

1. Disabled

2. Enabled

2 This option only appears when UNI port, EVC, or CE-VLAN is selected in the Application. The option appears as UNI port of profile whenUNI port is selected in the Application and as EVC of profile when EVC or CE-VLAN is selected in the Application.

3 This option only appears when CE-VLAN CoS is selected in the Application.

1. One-to-One Port/Group Mapping with Default EVC VIDs

2. One-to-One Port/Group Mapping with Transparent EVCs

K

61189901L1-1B 6-19



J

L

6. Ethernet Client Ports1. - 4. Ethernet Client Port 1 - 4

1. Ethernet State

2. Provisioned Rate & Duplex

Functional Rate & Duplex

3. Cross-Over Mode

4. Link State Awareness

Link Status

1. Disabled

2. Enabled

1. Auto

2. 10, Half

3. 10, Full

4. 100, Half

5. 100, Full

1. MDI

2. MDI-X

3. Auto

1. Disabled

2. Enabled

8. Equipment Protection1. Perform Manual Switch

7. Traffic Classes1. - 7. Traffic Class 0 - 7

Enter Queue Depth (packets)

6-20 61189901L1-1B



L

9. General

1. Craft Port Baud Rate

Functional Baud Rate

2. Date

3. Time

4. Auto-Logoff Inactivity Time

5. System ID

6. Scheduled Card Reset

7. Card Reset

8. Restore Default Provisioning

1. Auto

2. Disabled

5. 38400

6. 57600

7. 115200

3. 9600

4. 19200

1. Disabled

4. 10-Min

5. 15-Min

2. 1-Min

3. 5-Min

7. 45-Min

8. 60-Min

6. 30-Min

11. Save Provisioning

12. Auto Save1. Disabled

2. Enabled

13. Security Administration

14. Change ADMIN’s Password

1. Users Currently Logged On

2. Edit User Accounts

3. Access Tech Support Account

4. Restore Default Security Settings

1. ADMIN

2. READONLY

3. READWRITE

4. TEST

1. Enable/Disable User Account

2. Access Rights

3. Change Password

4. Delete User

1. READ

2. TEST

3. READ/WRITE

4. ADMIN

10. Network ManagementM

61189901L1-1B 6-21


Figure 6-13. Network Management Menu Tree - Copper Mode

1. Management Mode

2. IP Address

3. Subnet Mask

4. Gateway

MAC Address

5. TFTP Server

6. Rear Ethernet Interface

7. Network Service Ports

8. SNMP

1. Management Mode

2. Management VLAN ID

3. Management Port/Group

1. Disabled

2. Local

3. VLAN

1. - 4. Port 1 - 4

5. - 8. Group 1 - 4



2. Cross-Over Mode

Link Status

2. 10 Mbps Half Duplex

3. 10 Mbps Full Duplex

1. Auto



1. MDI

2. MDI-X

3. Auto

1. TL1 Telnet Port

2. TL1 Raw-TCP Port

3. Secondary Telnet Port

1. SNMP State1. Disabled

2. Enabled

2. SNMP Traps1. Disabled

2. Enabled

3. - 6. Trap Host 1 - 4

1. Status1. Valid

2. Under Creation

3. Invalid2. IP

3. Version1. Version 1

2. Version 24. Confirmation Timeout (sec)

5. Confirmation Retries7. System ID

8. System Location

9. System Contact

10. Read Community

11. Write Community

M

Denotes that these items only appear when Valid or Under Creation is selected in the Status.

6-22 61189901L1-1B


Figure 6-14. Quick Setup Menu Tree - Copper Mode

B

2. Select Ethernet Client Ports

4. Management Mode

5. IP Address

6. Subnet Mask

7. Gateway

8. Date

9. Time

10. System ID

11. - 22. DS1 Port 1 - 12

1. Ethernet State



3. Cross-Over Mode


Link Status

1. Disabled

2. Enabled

1. Auto

2. 10, Half

3. 10, Full

4. 100, Half

5. 100, Full

1. MDI

2. MDI-X

3. Auto

1. Disabled

2. Enabled

1. - 4. Ethernet Client Port 1 - 4

3. Packet Flows (Same As Provisioning\Packet Flows)

1. Management Mode



1. Disabled

2. Local

3. VLAN

1. - 4. Port 1 - 4

5. - 8. Group 1 - 4

1. Application Mode (Same As Provisioning\Application Mode)

61189901L1-1B 6-23


Figure 6-15. Status and Test Menu Trees - Copper Mode

C

1. Controller Equipment

2. Environmental Alarms

3. Ethernet Client Ports

4. DS1 Ports

5. Bonding Group Status

D

1. - 12. DS1 Port 1 - 12

14. Test Alarm Relays

15. Reset ALL Tests

1. No Test

3. Digital Line

4. CSU Loopback

5. CSU LB w/ Pattern

6. NIU Loopback

7. NIU LB w/ Pattern

2. Analog Network

8. Pattern Test

1. Alarm Relay Test Status1. Inactive

2. Active

16. Test Timeout

17. Pattern

1. Disabled

2. 1 minute

3. 5 minutes

4. 10 minutes

5. 15 minutes

6. 30 minutes

7. 45 minutes

8. 60 minutes

1. QRSS

2. ALL ONES

3. ALL ZEROS

4. 2 IN 8 (2:6)

5. 1 IN 8 (1:7)

6. 2^15-1 INV

13. Bonding DS1s1. - 12. DS1 Port 1 - 12

1. No Test

3. Payload

2. Line

Status

Test

6-24 61189901L1-1B


Figure 6-16. Performance Monitoring Menu Tree - Copper Mode

E

1. DS1 Port Statistics

2. DS1 Bonding Statistics

3. Bonding Group Statistics

4. Ethernet Client Statistics

5. Reset ALL Current Interval PM Data

6. Reset ALL PM Data

7. Reset ALL PM Thresholds to Defaults

8. Enable ALL PM Thresholds

9. Disable ALL PM Thresholds

M

O

P

Q

61189901L1-1B 6-25


Figure 6-17. DS1 Port Statistics Menu Tree - Copper Mode

1. - 12. DS1 #1 - #12 [PM Data]

13. Reset ALL DS1 Port Current Interval PM Data

14. Reset ALL DS1 Port PM Data

15. Reset ALL DS1 Port Thresholds

16. Enable ALL DS1 Port Thresholds

17. Disable ALL DS1 Port Thresholds

1. Near End Daily

2. Near End Quarter Hourly

3. Near End Daily Thresholds

4. Near End Quarter Hourly Thresholds

5. Reset DS1 # Current Interval PM Data

6. Reset DS1 # PM Data

1. CV-L

2. ES-L

3. SES-L

4. LOSS-L

1. CV-L

2. ES-L

3. SES-L

4. LOSS-L

5. Reset selected DS1 Thresholds to Defaults

6. Enable selected DS1 Thresholds

7. Disable selected DS1 Thresholds

1. Threshold

2. Alarm1. Disabled

2. Enabled

N

6-26 61189901L1-1B


Figure 6-18. DS1 Bonding Statistics Menu Tree - Copper Mode

1. - 12. DS1 #1 - #12 [PM Data]

13. Reset ALL DS1 Bonding Current Interval PM Data

14. Reset ALL DS1 Bonding PM Data

15. Reset ALL DS1 Bonding Thresholds

16. Enable ALL DS1 Bonding Thresholds

17. Disable ALL DS1 Bonding Thresholds

1. Near End Daily


3. Far End Daily

4. Far End Quarter Hourly



7. Far End Daily Thresholds

8. Far End Quarter Hourly Thresholds



1. CV-P

2. ES-P

3. SES-P

4. UAS-P

1. CV-PFE

2. ES-PFE

3. SES-PFE

4. UAS-PFE

1. CV-P

2. ES-P

3. SES-P

4. UAS-P




1. Threshold

2. Alarm1. Disabled

2. Enabled

1. CV-PFE

2. ES-PFE

3. SES-PFE

4. UAS-PFE




1. Threshold

2. Alarm1. Disabled

2. Enabled

O

61189901L1-1B 6-27


Figure 6-19. Bonding Group Statistics Menu Tree - Copper Mode

1. Daily Performance

2. Quarter Hourly Performance

3. Daily Thresholds

4. Quarter Hourly Thresholds

5. Reset Bonding Group # Current Interval PM Data

6. Reset Bonding Group # PM Data

1. Rx Frames

2. Rx Bytes

3. Rx Errored Events

5. Tx Bytes

1. Rx Frames

2. Rx Bytes

3. Rx Error Events

5. Tx Bytes

6. Reset ALL Bonding Group Thresholds

7. Enable ALL Bonding Group Thresholds

8. Disable ALL Bonding Group Thresholds

1. Threshold

2. Alarm1. Disabled

2. Enabled

1. - 4. Bonding Group 1 - 4

5. Reset ALL Bonding Group Current Interval PM Data

6. Reset ALL Bonding Group PM Data




4. Tx Frames

4. Tx Frames

P

6-28 61189901L1-1B


Figure 6-20. Ethernet Client Statistics Menu Tree - Copper Mode



3. Daily Thresholds


5. Reset Ethernet Port # Current Interval PM Data

6. Reset Ethernet Port # PM Data

1. Rx Packets

2. Rx Octets

3. Rx CRC & Align Errors

8. Tx Octets

1. Rx Packets

2. Rx Octets


8. Tx Octets

9. Reset Thresholds to Defaults for selected Port

10. Enable Thresholds for selected Port

11. Disable Thresholds for selected Port

1. Threshold

2. Alarm1. Disabled

2. Enabled

1. - 4. Ethernet Port 1 - 4

5. Reset ALL Ethernet Client Current Interval PM Data

6. Reset ALL Ethernet Client PM Data

7. Reset ALL Ethernet Client Thresholds

8. Enable ALL Ethernet Client Thresholds

9. Disable ALL Ethernet Client Thresholds

4. Rx Undersize Packets


5. Rx Oversize Packets

6. Rx Collisions


6. Rx CollisionsQ

7. Tx Packets

7. Tx Packets

61189901L1-1B 6-29


Figure 6-21. System Alarms and Firmware Upgrade Menu Trees - Copper Mode

F

1. Master Log

2. Controller A

Controller B

3. User-Definable Alarms

4. Alarm Chronology


2. Stand-by Controller Removed Level

1. - 4. Aux #1 - 4 Input

5. - 6. PWR Bus A/B Input

1. AUX # Input Description

2. AUX # Input Level1. Disabled

2. Info

3. Alert

4. Minor

5. Major

6. Critical

7. ACO

1. PWR A/B FAIL Level1. Disabled

2. Info

3. Alert

4. Minor

5. Major

6. Critical

1. Disabled

2. Info

3. Alert

4. Minor

5. Major

6. Critical

1. Ascending

2. Descending

G

Controller A

Controller B

1. Y-Modem

2. TFTP

3. Reset Active Controller

1. TFTP Server

2. Remote Filename

3. Initiate Transfer

System Alarms

Firmware Upgrade

6-30 61189901L1-1B


DS3 Mode

Figure 6-22. MX3112 Main Menu Tree - DS3 Mode

MX3112 Main Menu

1. Configuration

2. Provisioning

3. Quick Setup

4. Status

5. Test

8. Remote Management

9. or 10. Logout 2

A

B

C

D

7. System AlarmsF

8. or 9. Firmware Upgrade 1G

6. Performance MonitoringE

12

Denotes that this item only appears when COT is selected in the Application Mode.Appears as option 8 if RT is selected in the Application Mode and as option 9 if COT is selected in the Application Mode.Appears as option 9 if RT is selected in the Application Mode and as option 10 if COT is selected in the Application Mode.

Controller A/B

CLEI Code

Part Number

Serial Number

MAC Address

Product Revision

Code Version

Code Checksum

Boot Version

Boot Checksum

61189901L1-1B 6-31


Figure 6-23. Provisioning Menu Trees - DS3 Mode

1. COT/RT

2. Copper/DS3

4. Auto-Provisioning 1

1. COT

2. RT

1. Copper

2. DS3

1. Disabled

2. Enabled

A

1. Application Mode

2. DS3 Interface

1. Tx Framing

2. Tx Clock Source

3. Loopback Detection

4. DS3 Circuit Identifier

5. DS3 Equipment Identifier

1. C-Bit

2. M23

1. Loop

2. Local

1. Disabled

2. Enabled

1. Near End Facility ID Code

2. Near End Location ID Code

3. Near End Frame ID Code

4. Near End Unit Code

5. Near End Equipment Code

Far End Facility ID Code

Far End Location ID Code

Far End Frame ID Code

Far End Unit Code

Far End Equipment CodeH

3. DS1/E11. DS1

2. E1

4. E1 Framing Mode 21. PCM-30

5. Unframed

2. PCM-30 w/CRC

3. PCM-31

4. PCM-31 w/CRC

12

Appears as option 4 if RT and DS1 is selected in the Application Mode.Appears as option 4 if E1 is selected in the Application Mode.

6-32 61189901L1-1B


Figure 6-23. Provisioning Menu Trees - DS3 Mode (Continued)

H

3. DS1 Port Interfaces

1. - 12. DS1 Port 1 - 12

13. Copy Provisioning to Multiple

1. State

2. Line Length (feet)

3. Line Coding

4. Loopback Detection

5. Circuit Identifier

1. Disabled

2. Enabled

1. 0-133

2. 133-266

3. 266-399

4. 399-533

5. 533-655

1. AMI

2. B8ZS

1. Disabled

2. CSU

3. NIU

1. Copy FROM DS1 Port

Line Length (feet)

Line Coding

Loopback Detection

2. First DS1 Port to Copy TO

3. Last DS1 Port to Copy TO

4. Copy Provisioning

I

State

61189901L1-1B 6-33



I

J

3. DS1 Bonding

1. - 12. DS1 Port 1 - 12

13. DS1 Timing

1. Bonding Group

2. Loopback Detect1. Disabled

2. CSU

3. NIU

4. FDL

5. CSU + FDL

6. NIU + FDL

1. Loop

2. Line

3. Local

3. State1. IS

2. OOS

1. DS1 Timing Mode


1. - 12. DS1 Port 1 - 12

13. Set ALL Expected Link IDs equal to Received Link IDs


1. Sent Link ID

Received Link ID

2. Expected Link ID

3. Set Expected Equal to Received

1. No Action

2. Alarm Only

3. Alarm + Link Drop

5. Bonding Groups1. - 4. Bonding Group 1 - 4

1. Skew Threshold (ms)

2. XCV Threshold1. Disabled

2. 1e-8

3. 1e-7

4. 1e-6

5. 1e-5

6. 1e-4

7. 1e-3

3. Remote Auto-Provisioned Group

Denotes that this item only appears when COT is selected in the Application Mode.

6-34 61189901L1-1B



J

K

5. Explicit 4 (CL)

6. Explicit 5 (VI)

5. Packet Flows

1. EVCs

2. Maps

1. Add EVC11. EVC Alias

EVC Status

2. EVC State

3. EVC Port

4. EVC VLAN ID

5. CE VLAN ID Preservation

6. Maps for this EVC

7. Delete this EVC

1. Disabled

2. Enabled


5.–8. Group 1–4

9. Unspecified

1. Disabled

2. Enabled

1. Add Map11. Associated EVC

2. Map Alias

Map Status

3. Map State

4. UNI Port

5. CE VLAN ID

6. CE VLAN P-bits2

7. DSCP value2

8. Untagged, Priority Tagged Frames2

9. Class of Service

10. Delete this Map

1. Disabled

2. Enabled

1. Disallow

2. Allow

1. Explicit 0 (BE)

2. Explicit 1 (BK)

3. Explicit 2

4. Explicit 3 (EE)

7. Explicit 6 (VO)

8. Explicit 7 (NC)

9. Inherit from CE VLAN P-bits


5.–8. Group 1–4

9. Unspecified

1 This option number increases or decreases by one as each flow is added or deleted.2 This option is available only when a CE VLAN ID is specified.

L

61189901L1-1B 6-35



3. Profiles

4. Pre-defined flows

5. Delete all flows

6. Egress Queue Depths

1. Add Profile11. Profile Alias

Profile Status

2. Profile State

3. Application

4. UNI port of profile or EVC of profile2

5. CoS value(s) of profile3

6. Rate Coupling

7. Committed Information Rate (kbps)

8. Committed Burst Size (bytes)

9. Excess Information Rate (kbps)

10. Excess Burst Size (bytes)

11. Maps for this profile

12. Delete this profile

1 This option number increases or decreases by one as each flow is added or deleted.

1. Disabled

2. Enabled

1. Unspecified

2. UNI port

3. EVC

CE-VLAN CoS

1. Disabled

2. Enabled

2 This option only appears when UNI port, EVC, or CE-VLAN is selected in the Application. The option appears as UNI port of profile whenUNI port is selected in the Application and as EVC of profile when EVC or CE-VLAN is selected in the Application.

3 This option only appears when CE-VLAN CoS is selected in the Application.

1. One-to-One Port/Group Mapping with Default EVC VIDs

2. One-to-One Port/Group Mapping with Transparent EVCs

L

6-36 61189901L1-1B



K

M

7. Ethernet Client Ports1. - 4. Ethernet Client Port 1 - 4

1. Ethernet State

2. Provisioned Link Speed & Duplex

Functional Link Speed & Duplex

3. Cross-Over Mode


Link Status

1. Disabled

2. Enabled

1. Auto

2. 10, Half

3. 10, Full

4. 100, Half

5. 100, Full

1. MDI

2. MDI-X

3. Auto

1. Disabled

2. Enabled

9. Equipment Protection1. Perform Manual Switch

8. Traffic Classes1. - 7. Traffic Class 0 - 7

Enter Queue Depth (packets)

61189901L1-1B 6-37



M

10. General

1. Craft Port Baud Rate

Functional Baud Rate

2. Date

3. Time

4. Auto-Logoff Inactivity Time

5. System ID

6. Scheduled Card Reset

7. Card Reset

8. Restore Default Provisioning

1. Auto

2. Disabled

5. 38400

6. 57600

7. 115200

3. 9600

4. 19200

1. Disabled

4. 10-Min

5. 15-Min

2. 1-Min

3. 5-Min

7. 45-Min

8. 60-Min

6. 30-Min

12. Save Provisioning

13. Auto Save1. Disabled

2. Enabled

14. Security Administration

15. Change ADMIN’s Password

1. Users Currently Logged On

2. Edit User Accounts

3. Access Tech Support Account

4. Restore Default Security Settings

1. ADMIN

2. READONLY

3. READWRITE

4. TEST

1. Enable/Disable User Account

2. Access Rights

3. Change Password

4. Delete User

1. READ

2. TEST

3. READ/WRITE

4. ADMIN

11. Network ManagementN

6-38 61189901L1-1B


Figure 6-24. Network Management Menu Tree - DS3 Mode

1. Management Mode

2. IP Address

3. Subnet Mask

4. Gateway

MAC Address

5. TFTP Server

6. Rear Ethernet Interface

7. Network Service Ports

8. SNMP

1. Management Mode



1. Disabled

2. Local

3. VLAN

1. - 4. Port 1 - 4

5. - 8. Group 1 - 4



2. Cross-Over Mode

Link Status



1. Auto



1. MDI

2. MDI-X

3. Auto

1. TL1 Telnet Port

2. TL1 Raw-TCP Port

3. Secondary Telnet Port

1. SNMP State1. Disabled

2. Enabled

2. SNMP Traps1. Disabled

2. Enabled

3. - 6. Trap Host 1 - 4

1. Status1. Valid

2. Under Creation

3. Invalid2. IP

3. Version1. Version 1

2. Version 24. Confirmation Timeout (sec)

5. Confirmation Retries7. System ID

8. System Location

9. System Contact

10. Read Community

11. Write Community

N

Denotes that these items only appear when Valid or Under Creation is selected in the Status.

61189901L1-1B 6-39


Figure 6-25. Quick Setup Menu Tree - DS3 Mode

B

2. Select Ethernet Client Ports

4. Management Mode

5. IP Address

6. Subnet Mask

7. Gateway

8. Date

9. Time

10. System ID

11. - 22. DS1 Port 1 - 12

1. Ethernet State



3. Cross-Over Mode


Link Status

1. Disabled

2. Enabled

1. Auto

2. 10, Half

3. 10, Full

4. 100, Half

5. 100, Full

1. MDI

2. MDI-X

3. Auto

1. Disabled

2. Enabled

1. - 4. Ethernet Client Port 1 - 4

3. Packet Flows (Same As Provisioning\Packet Flows)

1. Management Mode



1. Disabled

2. Local

3. VLAN

1. - 4. Port 1 - 4

5. - 8. Group 1 - 4

1. Application Mode (Same As Provisioning\Application Mode)

6-40 61189901L1-1B


Figure 6-26. Status and Test Menu Trees - DS3 Mode

C

1. Controller Equipment

2. DS3


4. Ethernet Client Ports

5. DS1 Ports

6. Bonding Group Status

1. Go to Test Menu for DS1s in DS3

D

1. - 12. DS1 Port 1 - 12

14. DS3

15. DS1s in DS3

1. No Test

3. Digital Line

4. CSU Loopback

5. CSU LB w/ Pattern

6. NIU Loopback


2. Analog Network

8. Pattern Test

2. Line Loopback

3. Digital Loopback

4. Remote Loopback

5. Remote ALL T1

1. No Test

1. - 28. DS1s in DS31. No Test

3. Remote Loopback

4. Remote Loopback w/ Pattern

5. CSU Loopback

6. CSU Loopback w/ Pattern

7. NIU Loopback

2. Tributary Loopback

9. Pattern Test


O

13. Bonding DS1s1. - 12. DS3 Trib 13 - 24

1. No Test

3. Payload

2. Line

Status

Test

61189901L1-1B 6-41


Figure 6-26. Test Menu Tree - DS3 Mode (Continued)

18. Test Timeout

19. Pattern

O

1. Disabled

2. 1 minute

3. 5 minutes

4. 10 minutes

5. 15 minutes

6. 30 minutes

7. 45 minutes

8. 60 minutes

1. QRSS

2. ALL ONES

3. ALL ZEROS

4. 2 IN 8 (2:6)

5. 1 IN 8 (1:7)

6. 2^15-1 INV

17. Reset ALL Tests

16. Test Alarm Relays1. Alarm Relay Test Status

1. Inactive

2. Active

6-42 61189901L1-1B


Figure 6-27. Performance Monitoring Menu Tree - DS3 Mode

E

1. DS3 Statistics

2. DS1 Port Statistics

4. Bonding Group Statistics

5. Ethernet Client Statistics

6. Reset ALL Current Interval PM Data

7. Reset ALL PM Data

8. Reset ALL PM Thresholds to Defaults

9. Enable ALL PM Thresholds

10. Disable ALL PM Thresholds

P

Q

S

T

3. DS1 Bonding StatisticsR

61189901L1-1B 6-43


Figure 6-28. DS3 Statistics Menu Tree - DS3 Mode

1. Near End Daily


3. Far End Daily




1. CVCP-PFE

2. ESCP-PFE

3. SESCP-PFE

4. UASCP-PFE

P

1. CV-L

2. ES-L

3. SES-L

4. LOSS-L

5. CVP-P

6. ESP-P

7. SESP-P

8. UASP-P

9. CVCP-P

10. ESCP-P

11. SESCP-P

12. UASCP-P

1. CV-L

2. ES-L

3. SES-L

4. LOSS-L

5. CVP-P

6. ESP-P

7. SESP-P

8. UASP-P

9. CVCP-P

10. ESCP-P

11. SESCP-P

12. UASCP-P

13. Reset selected DS3 PM Thresholds to Defaults

14. Enable selected DS3 PM Thresholds

15. Disable selected DS3 PM Thresholds

1. Threshold

2. Alarm1. Disabled

2. Enabled

U

6-44 61189901L1-1B


Figure 6-28. DS3 Statistics Menu Tree - DS3 Mode (Continued)



9. Reset DS3 Current Interval PM Data

10. Reset DS3 PM Data

1. CVCP-PFE

2. ESCP-PFE

3. SESCP-PFE

4. UASCP-PFE

5. Reset selected DS3 PM Thresholds to Defaults

6. Enable selected DS3 PM Thresholds

7. Disable selected DS3 PM Thresholds

1. Threshold

2. Alarm1. Disabled

2. Enabled

U

61189901L1-1B 6-45


Figure 6-29. DS1 Port Statistics Menu Tree - DS3 Mode

1. - 12. DS1 #1 - #12 [PM Data]

13. Reset ALL DS1 Port Current Interval PM Data

14. Reset ALL DS1 Port PM Data

15. Reset ALL DS1 Port Thresholds

16. Enable ALL DS1 Port Thresholds

17. Disable ALL DS1 Port Thresholds

1. Near End Daily






1. CV-L

2. ES-L

3. SES-L

4. LOSS-L

1. CV-L

2. ES-L

3. SES-L

4. LOSS-L




1. Threshold

2. Alarm1. Disabled

2. Enabled

Q

6-46 61189901L1-1B


Figure 6-30. DS1 Bonding Statistics Menu Tree - DS3 Mode

1. - 12. Trib #13 - #24 [PM Data]

13. Reset ALL DS1 Bonding Current Interval PM Data

14. Reset ALL DS1 Bonding PM Data

15. Reset ALL DS1 Bonding Thresholds

16. Enable ALL DS1 Bonding Thresholds

17. Disable ALL DS1 Bonding Thresholds

1. Near End Daily


3. Far End Daily






9. Reset Trib # Current Interval PM Data

10. Reset Trib # PM Data

1. CV-P

2. ES-P

3. SES-P

4. UAS-P

1. CV-PFE

2. ES-PFE

3. SES-PFE

4. UAS-PFE

1. CV-P

2. ES-P

3. SES-P

4. UAS-P




1. Threshold

2. Alarm1. Disabled

2. Enabled

1. CV-PFE

2. ES-PFE

3. SES-PFE

4. UAS-PFE




1. Threshold

2. Alarm1. Disabled

2. Enabled

R

61189901L1-1B 6-47


Figure 6-31. Bonding Group Statistics Menu Tree - DS3 Mode



3. Daily Thresholds


5. Reset Bonding Group # Current Interval PM Data

6. Reset Bonding Group # PM Data

1. Rx Frames

2. Rx Bytes

3. Rx Errored Events

5. Tx Bytes

1. Rx Frames

2. Rx Bytes

3. Rx Error Events

5. Tx Bytes




1. Threshold

2. Alarm1. Disabled

2. Enabled

1. - 4. Bonding Group 1 - 4

5. Reset ALL Bonding Group Current Interval PM Data

6. Reset ALL Bonding Group PM Data




4. Tx Frames

4. Tx Frames

S

6-48 61189901L1-1B


Figure 6-32. Ethernet Client Statistics Menu Tree - DS3 Mode

1. - 4. Ethernet Port 1 - 4

5. Reset ALL Ethernet Client Current Interval PM Data

6. Reset ALL Ethernet Client PM Data

7. Reset ALL Ethernet Client Thresholds

8. Enable ALL Ethernet Client Thresholds

9. Disable ALL Ethernet Client Thresholds

T



3. Daily Thresholds


5. Reset Ethernet Port # Current Interval PM Data

6. Reset Ethernet Port # PM Data

1. Rx Packets

2. Rx Octets


8. Tx Octets

1. Rx Packets

2. Rx Octets


8. Tx Octets

9. Reset Thresholds to Defaults for selected Port

10. Enable Thresholds for selected Port

11. Disable Thresholds for selected Port

1. Threshold

2. Alarm1. Disabled

2. Enabled




6. Rx Collisions


6. Rx Collisions

7. Tx Packets

7. Tx Packets

61189901L1-1B 6-49


Figure 6-33. System Alarms and Firmware Upgrade Menu Trees - DS3 Mode

F

1. Master Log

2. Controller A

Controller B

3. User-Definable Alarms

4. Alarm Chronology


2. Stand-by Controller Removed Level

1. - 4. Aux #1 - 4 Input

5. - 6. PWR Bus A/B Input

1. AUX # Input Description

2. AUX # Input Level1. Disabled

2. Info

3. Alert

4. Minor

5. Major

6. Critical

7. ACO

1. PWR A/B FAIL Level1. Disabled

2. Info

3. Alert

4. Minor

5. Major

6. Critical

1. Disabled

2. Info

3. Alert

4. Minor

5. Major

6. Critical

1. Ascending

2. Descending

G

Controller A

Controller B

1. Y-Modem

2. TFTP

3. Reset Active Controller

1. TFTP Server

2. Remote Filename

3. Initiate Transfer

System Alarms

Firmware Upgrade

6-50 61189901L1-1B

Section 6, User Interface - Menu Descriptions

MENU DESCRIPTIONSThis section describes the individual menus and screens of the MX3112 system.

MX3112 Main MenuThe MX3112 Main Menu (see Figure 6-34) is the access point to all other operations. Each Main Menu item has several functions and submenus that identify and provide access to specific operations and parameters.

Figure 6-34. MX3112 Main Menu

The MX3112 Main Menu options are shown in Table 6-2.

Table 6-2. MX3112 Main Menu Options

Option Description Function

1 Configuration This option displays the “Configuration Screen” on page 6-53.

2 Provisioning This option displays the “Provisioning Menu” on page 6-55.

3 Quick Setup This option displays the “Quick Setup Menu” on page 6-132.

4 Status This option displays the “Status Menu” on page 6-136.

5 Test This option displays the “Test Menu” on page 6-152.



MX3112

1 - Configuration

2 - Provisioning

3 - Quick Setup

4 - Status

5 - Test

6 - Performance Monitoring

7 - System Alarms

8 - Remote Management

9 - Firmware Upgrade

10 - Logout


61189901L1-1B 6-51


6 Performance Monitoring This option displays the “Performance Monitoring Menu” on page 6-165.

7 System Alarms This option displays the “System Alarms Menu” on page 6-213.

8 Remote Management This option displays the “Remote Management Menu (DS1 Mode Only)” on page 6-222.This option appears only when the Application Mode is set to COT.

8 or 9 Firmware Upgrade This option displays the “Firmware Upgrade Menu” on page 6-223.This option appears as option 8 if RT is selected in the Application Mode and as option 9 if COT is selected in the Application Mode.

9 or 10 Logout This option displays “Logout” on page 6-227.This option appears as option 9 if RT is selected in the Application Mode and as option 10 if COT is selected in the Application Mode.

Table 6-2. MX3112 Main Menu Options (Continued)


6-52 61189901L1-1B


Configuration ScreenThe Configuration screen (see Figure 6-35) displays information about the MX3112 system. Information such as Code Version changes as upgrades are performed. The CLEI Code and Part Number can be used to search for related information on the ADTRAN web site or to order additional parts. ADTRAN Technical Support can require some information from the Configu-ration screen.

Figure 6-35. Configuration Screen

The Configuration screen fields for Controller A and Controller B are shown in Table 6-3.

Table 6-3. Configuration Screen Fields

Field Description

CLEI Code This field displays the Common Language Equipment Identifier (CLEI) code of the MX3112 Controller Card.

Part Number This field displays the part number of the MX3112 Controller Card.

Serial Number This field displays the serial number of the MX3112 Controller Card.

MAC Address This field displays the factory programmed Media Access Control (MAC) or physical layer address for the MX3112 Controller Card.

Product Revision This field displays the hardware product assembly revision of the MX3112 Controller Card.

Code Version This field displays the current application firmware revision level of the MX3112 Controller Card.

Code Checksum This field displays the checksum of the current application firmware revision level of the MX3112 Controller Card.



MX3112->Configuration

Controller A

CLEI Code : M3CU100BTA Product Revision :

Part Number : 1189901L1 Code Version : A01

Serial Number : 1234567890 Code Checksum : 05F52B24

MAC Address : 00:00:00:00:00:00 Boot Version : A01

Boot Checksum : 02728600

Controller B

CLEI Code : M3CU100BTA Product Revision :

Part Number : 1189901L1 Code Version : A01

Serial Number : 1234567890 Code Checksum : 05F52B24

MAC Address : 00:00:00:00:00:00 Boot Version : A01

Boot Checksum : 02728600


61189901L1-1B 6-53


Boot Version This field displays the boot firmware revision code.

Boot Checksum This field displays the checksum of the boot firmware revision code.

Table 6-3. Configuration Screen Fields (Continued)

Field Description

6-54 61189901L1-1B


Provisioning MenuThe Provisioning menu (see Figure 6-36 for copper mode and Figure 6-37 for DS3 mode) is used to make provisioning changes to various options.

Figure 6-36. Provisioning Menu - Copper Mode

Figure 6-37. Provisioning Menu - DS3 Mode

The Provisioning menu options are shown in Table 6-4.



MX3112->Provisioning

1 - Application Mode : Copper, RT, Auto Prov Enabled

2 - DS1/E1 Port Interfaces

3 - DS1/E1 Bonding

4 - Bonding Groups

5 - Packet Flows

6 - Ethernet Client Ports

7 - Equipment Protection

8 - General

9 - Local Network Management

10 - Save Provisioning

11 - Auto Save : Enabled

12 - Security Administration

13 - Change ADMIN's Password




MX3112->Provisioning

1 - Application Mode : DS3, RT, Auto Prov Enabled

2 - DS3 Interface

3 - DS1/E1 Port Interfaces

4 - DS1/E1 Bonding

5 - Bonding Groups

6 - Packet Flows

7 - Ethernet Client Ports

8 - Equipment Protection

9 - General

10 - Local Network Management

11 - Save Provisioning

12 - Auto Save : Enabled

13 - Security Administration

14 - Change ADMIN's Password


61189901L1-1B 6-55


Table 6-4. Provisioning Menu Options

Option Description FunctionCopper DS3

1 1 Application Mode This option displays the “Application Mode Menu” on page 6-57.

N/A 2 DS3 Interface This option displays the “DS3 Interface Menu - DS3 Mode Only” on page 6-62.

2 3 DS1/E1 Port Interfaces This option displays the “DS1/E1 Port Interfaces Menu” on page 6-66.

3 4 DS1/E1 Bonding This option displays the “DS1/E1 Bonding Menu” on page 6-73.

4 5 Bonding Groups This option displays the “Bonding Groups Menu” on page 6-86.

5 6 Packet Flows This option displays the “Flows Menu” on page 6-90.

6 7 Ethernet Client Ports This option displays the “Ethernet Client Ports Menu” on page 6-108.

7 8 Equipment Protection This option displays the “Equipment Protection Menu” on page 6-111.

8 9 General This option displays the “General Provisioning Menu” on page 6-112.

9 10 Network Management This option displays the “Network Management Menu” on page 6-114.

10 11 Save Provisioning This option saves the current network settings.

11 12 Auto Save This option displays the “Auto Save Menu” on page 6-125.

12 13 Security Administration This option displays the “Security Administration Menu” on page 6-126.

13 14 Change Current ADMIN’s Password

This option allows the current user to change their password.

6-56 61189901L1-1B


Application Mode MenuThe Application Mode menu (see Figure 6-38 for DS1 mode and Figure 6-39 for E1 mode) is used to select the terminal mode, application mode, and auto provisioning state. Refer to Table 6-6 for detailed information on the different application mode combinations.

Figure 6-38. Application Mode Menu - DS1 Mode

Figure 6-39. Application Mode Menu - E1 Mode



MX3112->Provisioning->Application Mode

1 - COT/RT : RT

2 - Copper/DS3 : Copper

3 - DS1/E1 : DS1

4 - Auto Provisioning : Enabled




MX3112->Provisioning->Application Mode

1 - COT/RT : RT

2 - Copper/DS3 : Copper

3 - DS1/E1 : E1

4 - E1 Framing Mode : Unframed


61189901L1-1B 6-57


The Application Mode menu options are shown in Table 6-5.

Table 6-5. Application Mode Menu Options


1 COT/RT This option determines whether the MX3112 Controller Card operates as the master (COT) or as the slave (RT). Options are as follows:

• COT• RT: This option is the default setting and is

typically used when the MX3112 system is connected to the OPTI-6100 GEFM.

When this option is set to COT mode, the transmit timing for the bonded DS1s is automatically provisioned as Local. When this option is set to RT mode, the transmit timing for the bonded DS1s is automatically provisioned as Loop. These timing options can be changed independently, if needed.When operating in COT mode, the unit periodically transmits certain provisioning information toward the RT device via the bonded DS1s. This information includes the bonding group assignments for each DS1.

2 Copper/DS3 This parameter determines whether the network interface on the MX3112 system is configured for copper mode (twelve DS1/E1s) or for DS3 mode (channelized DS3). Options are as follows:

• Copper• DS3

Reference the “Application Guidelines” on page 3-1 for a detailed explanation of this option.

3 DS1/E1 This parameter determines whether the bonded channels for copper mode are formatted as DS1 or E1 mode. Options are as follows:

• DS1• E1

6-58 61189901L1-1B


4 Auto Provisioning This option, which is only available when the system is provisioned for RT mode and DS1 mode, is used to select the auto provisioning state. Options are as follows:

• Disabled: This option disables auto provisioning. When disabled, the unit does not respond to the bonding group assignment messages received from the COT system. The bonding group assignments must be performed manually.

• Enabled: This option enables auto provisioning. When enabled, the unit responds to the bonding group assignment messages received from the COT system. The automatic provisioning overrides any manual bonding group assignments performed at the RT. The system ID of the RT is sent to the COT. This parameter is programmed into the MX3112 system when it is installed and allows a user-friendly ID to be displayed on the Remote Management menu of the COT.

4 E1 Framing This option, which is only available when the system is provisioned for E1 mode, displays the “E1 Framing Mode Menu” on page 6-60.

Table 6-6. Application Mode Combinations

Controller DS3/Copper DS1/E1 Description

List 1 DS3 DS1 DS1 tributaries 1–12 accessible on chassis DSX-1 connectors; DS1 tributaries 13–24 available for bonding to carry Ethernet traffic; DS1 tributaries 24–28 are not accessible.

List 2 DS3 DS1 DS1 tributaries 1–12 accessible on chassis DSX-1 connectors; DS1 tributaries 13–28 available for bonding to carry Ethernet traffic.

List 1 or List 2

Copper DS1 Twelve DS1 channels available on chassis DSX-1 connectors for bonding to carry Ethernet traffic.

List 1 Copper E1 Twelve E1 channels available on chassis DSX-1 connectors for bonding to carry Ethernet traffic.

Table 6-5. Application Mode Menu Options (Continued)


61189901L1-1B 6-59


E1 Framing Mode MenuThe E1 Framing Mode menu (see Figure 6-40) determines the E1 framing mode for all E1 channels.

Figure 6-40. E1 Framing Mode Menu

The E1 Framing Mode menu options are shown in Table 6-7.

Table 6-7. E1 Framing Mode Menu Options


1 PCM-30 This option configures the E1 framing as the following:

• Timeslot 0 carries basic FAS/NFAS framing.• Timeslot 16 is unused.• The remaining thirty timeslots carry payload.

2 PCM-30 w/CRC This option configures the E1 framing as the following:

• Timeslot 0 carries multiframe sequence with CRC4.

• Timeslot 16 is unused.• The remaining thirty timeslots carry payload.

3 PCM-31 This option configures the E1 framing as the following:

• Timeslot 0 carries basic FAS/NFAS framing.• The remaining thirty-one timeslots carry

payload.



E1 Framing Mode : Unframed

1 - PCM-30

2 - PCM-30 w/CRC

3 - PCM-31

4 - PCM-31 w/CRC

5 - Unframed


6-60 61189901L1-1B


4 PCM-31 w/CRC This option configures the E1 framing as the following:

• Timeslot 0 carries multiframe sequence with CRC4.

• The remaining thirty-one timeslots carry payload.

5 Unframed This option configures the E1 framing to where all thirty-two timeslots carry customer payload.

Table 6-7. E1 Framing Mode Menu Options (Continued)


61189901L1-1B 6-61


DS3 Interface Menu - DS3 Mode OnlyThe DS3 Interface menu (see Figure 6-41) provides options to provision the Tx framing, Tx clock source, loopback detection, DS3 circuit identifier, and DS3 equipment identification.

Figure 6-41. DS3 Interface Menu - DS3 Mode

The DS3 Interface menu options are shown in Table 6-8.

Table 6-8. DS3 Interface Menu Options - DS3 Mode


1 Tx Framing This option is used to provision the framing. Options are as follows:

• C-bit• M23 (also called “M13”)

2 Tx Clock Source This option is used to provision the timing. Options are as follows:

• Loop: When this option is selected, timing is received from the DS3 network.

• Local: When this option is selected, timing is 44.736 Mbps ± 20 ppm (ANSI T1.102-1993).



MX3112->Provisioning->DS3 Interface

1 - Tx Framing : M23

2 - Tx Clock Source : Local

3 - Loopback Detection : Enabled

4 - DS3 Circuit Identifier : DS3 A

5 - DS3 Equipment Identification


6-62 61189901L1-1B


3 Loopback Detection This option is used to disable or enable the FEAC and C-bit loopbacks. Options are as follows:

• Disabled: When this option is selected, the MX3112 system ignores all out of band loopback requests (FEAC and DS2-Level C-bit). The MX3112 system responds to individual T1 in-band CSU/NIU loopbacks if the system is configured with the T1 loopback menu.

• Enabled: When this option is selected, the MX3112 system responds to remote loopback requests received over the DS3 far end alarm and control (FEAC) channel and/or the DS2-level C-bits. This mode is valid for both C-bit and M23 framing formats.

4 DS3 Circuit Identifier This option is used to enter a DS3 circuit identifier. This field accepts up to 32 alphanumeric characters, including spaces and special characters.

5 DS3 Equipment Identification This option displays the “Equipment Identification Menu - DS3 Mode Only” on page 6-64.

Table 6-8. DS3 Interface Menu Options - DS3 Mode (Continued)


61189901L1-1B 6-63


Equipment Identification Menu - DS3 Mode OnlyThe Equipment Identification menu (see Figure 6-42) is used to enter ID codes for the near and far end facilities, locations, frames, units, and equipment. These fields provide user-configurable text strings to identify the MX3112 system over the network.

Figure 6-42. Equipment Identification Menu - DS3 Mode

The Equipment Identification menu options are shown in Table 6-9.

Table 6-9. Equipment Identification Menu Options - DS3 Mode


1 Near End Facility ID Code This option is used to enter a near end facility ID code that is transmitted in the DS3 overhead to the next device. The code is an user-configurable text string. This field accepts up to 38 alphanumeric characters, including spaces and special characters.

2 Near End Location ID Code This option is used to enter a near end location ID code that is transmitted in the DS3 overhead to the next device. The code is an user-configurable text string. This field accepts up to 11 alphanumeric characters, including spaces and special characters.



MX3112->Provisioning->DS3 Interface->Equipment Identification

1 - Near End Facility ID Code : N/A

2 - Near End Location ID Code : N/A

3 - Near End Frame ID Code : N/A

4 - Near End Unit Code : N/A

5 - Near End Equipment Code : N/A

Far End Facility ID Code : N/A

Far End Location ID Code : N/A

Far End Frame ID Code : N/A

Far End Unit Code : N/A

Far End Equipment Code : N/A


6-64 61189901L1-1B


3 Near End Frame ID Code This option is used to enter a near end frame ID code that is transmitted in the DS3 overhead to the next device. The code is an user-configurable text string. This field accepts up to 10 alphanumeric characters, including spaces and special characters.

4 Near End Unit Code This option is used to enter a near end unit code that is transmitted in the DS3 overhead to the next device. The code is an user-configurable text string. This field accepts up to 6 alphanumeric characters, including spaces and special characters.

5 Near End Equipment Code This option is used to enter a near end equipment code that is transmitted in the DS3 overhead to the next device. The code is a user-configurable text string. This field accepts up to 10 alphanumeric characters, including spaces and special characters.

Far End Facility ID Code This field displays the facility ID code that is received in the DS3 overhead from the device at the far end of the DS3.

Far End Location ID Code This field displays the location ID code that is received in the DS3 overhead from the device at the far end of the DS3.

Far End Frame ID Code This field displays the frame ID code that is received in the DS3 overhead from the device at the far end of the DS3.

Far End Unit Code This field displays the unit code that is received in the DS3 overhead from the device at the far end of the DS3.

Far End Equipment Code This field displays the equipment code that is received in the DS3 overhead from the device at the far end of the DS3.

Table 6-9. Equipment Identification Menu Options - DS3 Mode (Continued)


61189901L1-1B 6-65


DS1/E1 Port Interfaces MenuThe DS1 Port Interfaces menu (see Figure 6-43 for copper mode and Figure 6-44) is used to view the current settings and access the provisioning options for each DS1/E1 port.

Figure 6-43. DS1/E1 Port Interfaces Menu - Copper Mode

Figure 6-44. DS1/E1 Port Interfaces Menu - DS3 Mode

The DS1/E1 Port Interfaces menu options are shown in Table 6-10.



MX3112->Provisioning->DS1/E1 Ports

DS1 Line

Port State Length(ft) Circuit ID

1 - Enabled 0-133 DS1 Port #1












13 - Copy Provisioning to Multiple **Copper mode. All DS1s use B8ZS coding.**




MX3112->Provisioning->DS1/E1 Ports

DS1 Line Line Loopback

Port State Length(ft) Coding Detect Circuit ID

1 - Enabled 0-133 B8ZS Disabled DS1 Port #1












13 - Copy Provisioning to Multiple


6-66 61189901L1-1B


Table 6-10. DS1 Port Interfaces Menu Options


1–12 DS1/E1 Port # This option displays the “DS1/E1 Port Provisioning Menu” on page 6-68.

13 Copy Provisioning to Multiple This option displays the “Copy Provisioning to Mul-tiple Ports Menu” on page 6-71.

61189901L1-1B 6-67


DS1/E1 Port Provisioning MenuThe DS1 Port Provisioning menu (see Figure 6-45 for copper mode and Figure 6-46 for DS3 mode) is used to set the state, line length, and circuit identifier for each individual DS1/E1 port. In DS3 mode, this menu is used to also provision the line coding and loopback detection.

NOTEIn copper mode, all DS1s use B8ZS coding.

Figure 6-45. DS1/E1 Port Provisioning Menu - Copper Mode



MX3112->Provisioning->DS1/E1 Ports->Port #1

1 - State : Enabled

2 - Line Length (feet) : 0-133

3 - Circuit Identifier : DS1 Port #1


6-68 61189901L1-1B


Figure 6-46. DS1/E1 Port Provisioning Menu - DS3 Mode

The DS1/E1 Port Provisioning menu options are shown in Table 6-11.

Table 6-11. DS1/E1 Port Provisioning Menu Fields

Option Field DescriptionCopper DS3

1 1 State This option is used to set the state. Options are as follows:

• Disabled: The DS1/E1 transmit drivers are tri-stated, and no alarms associated with this port are reported.

• Enabled: The DS1/E1 drivers are enabled and alarms are not suppressed.

2 2 Line Length (feet) This option is used to set the line length (line build out) for each port interface according to the dis-tance from the MX3112 system to the DTE device. Options are as follows:

• 0–133• 133–266• 266–399• 399–533• 533–655• 0–6 dB (E1 Mode Only)



MX3112->Provisioning->DS1/E1 Ports->Port #1

1 - State : Enabled

2 - Line Length (feet) : 0-133

3 - Line Coding : B8ZS

4 - Loopback Detection : Disabled

5 - Circuit Identifier : DS1 Port #1


61189901L1-1B 6-69


N/A 3 Line Coding This option is used to select the line coding state. Options are as follows:

• AMI• B8ZS/HDB3

N/A 4 Loopback Detection (DS1 Mode Only)

This option is used to select the loopback detect state. Options are as follows:

• Disabled• CSU• NIU

3 5 Circuit Identifier This option is used to enter a circuit identifier. The circuit ID is a user-configurable text string field used to name the individual ports. This field accepts up to 32 alphanumeric characters, including spaces and special characters.

Table 6-11. DS1/E1 Port Provisioning Menu Fields (Continued)


6-70 61189901L1-1B


Copy Provisioning to Multiple Ports MenuThe Copy Provisioning to Multiple Ports menu (see Figure 6-47 for copper mode and Figure 6-48 for DS3 mode) is used to copy port settings to multiple ports at once.

Figure 6-47. Copy Provisioning to Multiple Ports Menu - Copper Mode

Figure 6-48. Copy Provisioning to Multiple Ports Menu - DS3 Mode

The Copy Provisioning to Multiple Ports menu options are shown in Table 6-12.



MX3112->Provisioning->DS1/E1 Ports->Copy Provisioning to Multiple Ports

1 - Copy FROM DS1/E1 Port : 1

State : Enabled

Line Length (feet) : 0-133

Loopback Detection : Disabled

2 - First DS1/E1 Port to Copy TO : 2

3 - Last DS1/E1 Port to Copy TO : 12

4 - Copy Provisioning




MX3112->Provisioning->DS1/E1 Ports->Copy Provisioning to Multiple Ports

1 - Copy FROM DS1/E1 Port : 1

State : Enabled

Line Length (feet) : 0-133

Line Coding : B8ZS

Loopback Detection : Disabled

2 - First DS1/E1 Port to Copy TO : 2

3 - Last DS1/E1 Port to Copy TO : 12

4 - Copy Provisioning


61189901L1-1B 6-71


Table 6-12. Copy Provisioning to Multiple Ports Menu Options


1 Copy FROM DS1/E1 Port This option is used to enter the DS1/E1 Port # from which the settings are copied.

State This field displays the state setting that is to be copied.

Line Length (feet) This field displays the line length setting that is to be copied.

Line Coding (DS3 Mode Only) This field displays the line coding setting that is to be copied.

Loopback Detection This field displays the loopback detection setting that is to be copied.

2 First DS1/E1 Port to Copy TO This option is used to enter the first DS1/E1 Port # to which the settings are copied.

3 Last DS1/E1 Port to Copy TO This option is used to enter the last DS1/E1 Port # to which the settings are copied.

4 Copy Provisioning This option copies the settings to the selected DS1/E1 ports.

6-72 61189901L1-1B


DS1/E1 Bonding MenuThe DS1/E1 Bonding menu (see Figure 6-49 for copper mode and Figure 6-50 for DS3 mode) is used to view the current settings and access the bonding group, loopback, and state options for each DS1/E1 port in copper mode and each DS3 tributary in DS3 mode.

Figure 6-49. DS1/E1 Bonding Menu - Copper Mode

Figure 6-50. DS1/E1 Bonding Menu - DS3 Mode



MX3112->Provisioning->DS1/E1 Bonding

DS1 Port Bonding Group Lpbk Detect State

1 - 1 Disabled Disabled IS These DS1s always use

2 - 2 Disabled Disabled IS ESF framing.

3 - 3 Disabled Disabled IS

4 - 4 Disabled Disabled IS Auto Provisioning Enabled.

5 - 5 Disabled Disabled IS Bonding Group Assignment

6 - 6 Disabled Disabled IS controlled by COT.







13 - Timing : Loop

14 - Link Identifiers




MX3112->Provisioning->DS1/E1 Bonding

DS3 Trib Bonding Group Lpbk Detect State

1 - 13 Disabled Disabled IS These DS1s always use

2 - 14 Disabled Disabled IS ESF framing.


4 - 16 Disabled Disabled IS Auto Provisioning Enabled.

5 - 17 Disabled Disabled IS Bonding Group Assignment

6 - 18 Disabled Disabled IS controlled by COT.







13 - Timing : Loop

14 - Link Identifiers

Selection : '?' - System Help Scree

61189901L1-1B 6-73


NOTEFor the List 2 Controller, the DS1 Bonding menu in DS3 mode dis-plays DS3 tributaries 25–28. The additional tributaries are dis-played by using the hot keys listed in Table 6-14.

The DS1/E1 Bonding menu options are shown in Table 6-13.

The DS1/E1 Bonding menu hot keys are shown in Table 6-14.

Table 6-13. DS1/E1 Bonding Menu Options


1–12 N/A DS1/E1 Port 1–12 This option displays the “DS1/E1 Port 1–12 Menu - Copper Mode Only” on page 6-75.

N/A 1–12 DS3 Tributary 13–24 This option displays the “DS3 Tributary Provisioning Menu - DS3 Mode Only” on page 6-77.

13 13 Timing This option displays the “Timing Mode Menu” on page 6-82.

14 14 Link Identifiers This option displays the “Link Identifiers Menu (DS1 Mode Only)” on page 6-83.

Table 6-14. DS1/E1 Bonding Menu Hot Keys - DS3 Mode

Hot Keys Description Function

N Next This hot key displays the next page of tributaries.

P Previous This hot key displays the previous page of tributaries.

6-74 61189901L1-1B


DS1/E1 Port 1–12 Menu - Copper Mode OnlyThe DS1/E1 Port 1–12 menu (see Figure 6-55) is used to provision the bonding group, loopback detection, and state for each individual port.

Figure 6-51. DS1/E1 Port 1–12 Menu - Copper Mode

The DS1/E1 Port 1–12 menu options are shown in Table 6-15.

Table 6-15. DS1/E1 Port 1–12 Menu Options - Copper Mode


1 Bonding Group This option is used to enter the bonding group assignment for each DS1/E1 port.

• Enter 1 to assign a port to Bonding Group 1.• Enter 2 to assign a port to Bonding Group 2.• Enter 3 to assign a port to Bonding Group 3.• Enter 4 to assign a port to Bonding Group 4.• Enter 0 to remove a port from the bonding group

it is assigned.The bonding group is automatically configured by the COT when auto provisioning is enabled.



MX3112->Provisioning->DS1/E1 Bonding->DS1 Port #1

1 - Bonding Group : Disabled

2 - Loopback Detect : Disabled

3 - State : IS


61189901L1-1B 6-75


2 Loopback Detect (DS1 Mode Only) This option is used to select the loopback detect state. Options are as follows:

• Disabled• CSU• NIU• FDL• CSU + FDL• NIU + FDL

3. State This option is used select the service state of the bonded DS1/E1. When the bonded DS1/E1 is set to out of service (OOS), it is possible to suppress the alarms on that channel. A DS1/E1 would typically be set to OOS during testing. Options are as follows:

• IS• OOS

Table 6-15. DS1/E1 Port 1–12 Menu Options - Copper Mode (Continued)


6-76 61189901L1-1B


DS3 Tributary Provisioning Menu - DS3 Mode OnlyThe DS3 Tributary Provisioning menu (see Figure 6-52) is used to provision the bonding group, loopback detection, and state for each individual DS3 tributary.

Figure 6-52. DS3 Tributary Provisioning Menu - DS3 Mode

The DS3 Tributary Provisioning menu options are shown in Table 6-16.

Table 6-16. DS3 Tributary Provisioning Menu Options - DS3 Mode


1 Bonding Group This option is used to enter the bonding group assignment for each DS3 tributary.

• Enter 1 to assign a DS3 tributary to Bonding Group 1.




• Enter 0 to remove a DS3 tributary from the bonding group it is assigned.

The bonding group is automatically configured by the COT when auto provisioning is enabled.



MX3112->Provisioning->DS1 Bonding->DS3 Trib #13

1 - Bonding Group : Disabled

2 - Loopback Detect : Disabled

3 - State : IS


61189901L1-1B 6-77


2 Loopback Detect (DS1 Mode Only) This option is used to select the loopback detect state. Options are as follows:

• Disabled• CSU• NIU• FDL• CSU + FDL• NIU + FDL

3 State This option is used select the service state of the DS3 tributary. When the tributary is set to out of service (OOS), it is possible to suppress the alarms on that channel. A tributary would typically be set to OOS during testing. Options are as follows:

• IS• OOS

Table 6-16. DS3 Tributary Provisioning Menu Options - DS3 Mode (Continued)


6-78 61189901L1-1B


Timing MenuThe Timing menu is used to provision the timing for the DS1/E1s. When local or loop is selected as the timing mode, the Timing menu is displayed as shown in Figure 6-53. When line is selected as the timing mode, the Timing menu is displayed as shown in Figure 6-54.

Figure 6-53. Timing Menu (Timing Mode = Local or Loop)

The Timing menu options are shown in Table 6-17.

Table 6-17. Timing Menu Options


1 Timing Mode This option displays the “Timing Mode Menu” on page 6-82.



MX3112->Provisioning->DS1/E1 Bonding->Timing

1 - Timing Mode : Loop


61189901L1-1B 6-79


Figure 6-54. Timing Menu (Timing Mode = Line)

The Timing menu options are shown in Table 6-18.

Table 6-18. Timing Menu Options


1 Timing Mode This option displays the “Timing Mode Menu” on page 6-82.

Functional Reference This field displays the status of the functional reference.

Primary Reference Status This field displays the functional status of the primary reference.

Secondary Reference Status This field displays the functional status of the secondary reference.

2 Primary Reference This option is used to select the primary reference. The options are one of the bonded DS1/E1s. If the primary reference fails, the secondary reference becomes the active timing reference.

3 Secondary Reference This option is used to select the secondary reference. The options are one of the bonded DS1/E1s.



MX3112->Provisioning->DS1 Bonding->DS1 Timing

1 - Timing Mode : Line

Functional Reference : Fail

Primary Reference Status : Fail

Secondary Reference Status : Fail

2 - Primary Reference : DS1 Port #1

3 - Secondary Reference : DS1 Port #1

4 - Line Timing Failure Mode : Loop

5 - Reference Restoration : Nonrevertive

6 - Switch Pri/Sec References


6-80 61189901L1-1B


4 Line Timing Failure Mode This option is used to set the timing mode if both the primary and secondary reference fail. Options are as follows:

• Loop• Local

5 Reference Restoration This option is used to provision the active timing reference. Options are as follows:

• Revertive: If provisioned as revertive, then the active timing reference reverts to the primary reference if the status is okay.

• Nonrevertive: If provisioned as non-revertive, then the system does not automatically revert to the primary reference.

6 Switch Pri/Sec References This option is used to swap the provisioned primary and secondary references.

Table 6-18. Timing Menu Options (Continued)


61189901L1-1B 6-81


Timing Mode MenuThe Timing Mode menu (see Figure 6-55) is used to control the transmit timing mode for the bonded DS1/E1s.

Figure 6-55. Timing Mode Menu

The Timing Mode menu options are shown in Table 6-19.

Table 6-19. Timing Mode Menu Options


1 Loop The transmit timing for each bonded DS1/E1 is derived from the respective received clock.

2 Line The transmit timing for all bonded DS1/E1s is derived from a common onboard timing source.

3 Local The transmit timing for all bonded DS1/E1s is derived from the received clock of a user-designated DS1/E1.



Timing Mode : Loop

1 - Loop

2 - Line

3 - Local


6-82 61189901L1-1B


Link Identifiers Menu (DS1 Mode Only)The Link Identifiers menu is shown in Figure 6-56 for copper mode and Figure 6-57 for DS3 mode. A link ID is analogous to a path trace string for bonded DS1s. The value is an ASCII text string that can be provisioned to be unique among other link ID values. Each direction of a bonded DS1 can be provisioned with a unique identification string for the purposes of verifying that the DS1s are properly connected. Actions can be taken if the received link ID is not equal to the expected link ID value for a given DS1.

Figure 6-56. Link Identifiers Menu - Copper Mode

Figure 6-57. Link Identifiers Menu - DS3 Mode



MX3112->Provisioning->DS1 Bonding->Link Identifiers

DS1 Port Sent Link ID Received Link ID Expected Link ID

1 - 1

2 - 2

3 - 3

4 - 4

5 - 5

6 - 6

7 - 7

8 - 8

9 - 9

10 - 10

11 - 11

12 - 12

13 - Set ALL Expected Link IDs equal to Received Link IDs

14 - Mismatch Action : No Action




MX3112->Provisioning->DS1 Bonding->Link Identifiers

DS3 Trib Sent Link ID Received Link ID Expected Link ID

1 - 13

2 - 14

3 - 15

4 - 16

5 - 17

6 - 18

7 - 19

8 - 20

9 - 21

10 - 22

11 - 23

12 - 24

13 - Set ALL Expected Link IDs equal to Received Link IDs

14 - Mismatch Action : No Action


61189901L1-1B 6-83


NOTEFor the List 2 Controller, the Link Identifiers menu in DS3 mode displays DS3 tributaries 25–28. The additional tributaries are dis-played by using the hot keys listed in Table 6-21.

The Link Identifiers menu options are shown in Table 6-20.

The Link Identifiers menu hot keys are shown in Table 6-21.

Table 6-20. Link Identifiers Menu Options


1–12 N/A DS1 Port 1–12 This option displays the “Link Identifiers DS1 Port Menu” on page 6-85.

N/A 1–12 DS1 Trib 1–12 This option displays the “Link Identifiers DS1 Port Menu” on page 6-85.

13 13 Set ALL Expected Link IDs equal to Received Link IDs

This option is used to set all expected link IDs to the received link IDs.

14 14 Mismatch Action This option is used to select the action to be taken in the event that the received link ID does not equal the expected value. Options are as follows:

• No Action: No action is taken.• Alarm Only: Issues an alarm for the DS1 that

indicates a link mismatch condition.• Alarm + Link Drop: Issues an alarm for the

DS1 that indicates a link mismatch condition. Removes the DS1 from the provisioned bonding group and reinstates the DS1 if the mismatch condition is cleared.

Table 6-21. Link Identifiers Menu Hot Keys - DS3 Mode




6-84 61189901L1-1B


Link Identifiers DS1 Port MenuThe Link Identifiers DS1 Port menu (see Figure 6-58) is used to enter or view identifiers for the sent, received, and expected links.

Figure 6-58. Link Identifiers DS1 Port Menu

The Link Identifiers DS1 Port menu options are shown in Table 6-22.

Table 6-22. Link Identifiers DS1 Port Menu Options


1 Sent Link ID This option is used to enter a sent link identifier. The sent link ID is a user-configurable text string field. This field accepts up to 20 alphanumeric char-acters, including spaces and special characters.

Received Link ID This field displays the received link ID.

2 Expected Link ID This option is used to enter a expected link identi-fier. The expected link ID is a user-configurable text string field. This field accepts up to 20 alphanu-meric characters, including spaces and special characters.

3 Set Expected Equal to Received This option is used to set the expected link ID to the same text string as the received link ID.



MX3112->Provisioning->DS1 Bonding->Link Identifiers->DS1 Port #1

1 - Sent Link ID :

Received Link ID :

2 - Expected Link ID :

3 - Set Expected Equal to Received


61189901L1-1B 6-85


Bonding Groups MenuThe Bonding Groups menu (see Figure 6-59 for RT mode and Figure 6-60 for COT mode) is used to view the current settings and access the provisioning options for each bonding group.

Figure 6-59. Bonding Groups Menu - RT Mode

Figure 6-60. Bonding Groups Menu - COT Mode

The Bonding Groups menu options are shown in Table 6-23.



MX3112->Provisioning->Bonding Groups

Bonding Group Skew Threshold (ms) XCV Threshold

1 - 4 1e-5

2 - 4 1e-5

3 - 4 1e-5

4 - 4 1e-5




MX3112->Provisioning->Bonding Groups

Remote Auto-Provisioned

Bonding Group Skew Threshold (ms) XCV Threshold Bonding Group

1 - 4 Disabled 1

2 - 4 Disabled 2

3 - 4 Disabled 3

4 - 4 Disabled 4


6-86 61189901L1-1B


Table 6-23. Bonding Groups Menu Options


1–4 Bonding Group 1–4 This option displays the “Bonding Group Provision-ing Menu” on page 6-88.

61189901L1-1B 6-87


Bonding Group Provisioning MenuThe Bonding Group Provisioning menu (see Figure 6-61) is used to provision the skew threshold and XCV threshold for each bonding group.

Figure 6-61. Bonding Group Provisioning Menu

The Bonding Group Provisioning menu options are shown in Table 6-24.

Table 6-24. Bonding Group Provisioning Menu Options


1 Skew Threshold This option is used to enter the maximum allowable skew threshold, in milliseconds, for each bonding group. Enter 0 to disable this option. Skew thresholds from 1 millisecond to 16 milliseconds (in 1 millisecond intervals) are available. The default skew threshold is 4 milliseconds.A DS1/E1 is automatically removed from a bonding group if the relative skew exceeds the specified threshold. The DS1/E1 is automatically added back to the group once the relative skew is below the threshold (plus 0.50 millisecond of hysteresis).



MX3112->Provisioning->Bonding Groups->Bonding Group #1

1 - Skew Threshold (ms) : 4

2 - XCV Threshold : Disabled

3 - Remote Auto-Provisioned Group : 1


6-88 61189901L1-1B


2 XCV Threshold This option is used to select the XCV threshold. Options are as follows:

• Disabled• 1e-8• 1e-7• 1e-6• 1e-5• 1e-4• 1e-3

A DS1 is automatically removed from a bonding group if the XCV exceeds the specified threshold. The DS1 is automatically added back to the group once the XCV is below the threshold.

3 Remote Auto-Provisioned Group This option sets the bonding group number of the RT system. For example, bonded DS1s 4–6 of the COT could be designated for both bonding group #2 of the COT and bonding group #3 of the RT.This option only appears when COT mode and DS1 mode are selected in the Application Mode.

Table 6-24. Bonding Group Provisioning Menu Options (Continued)


61189901L1-1B 6-89


Flows MenuThe Flows menu is shown in Figure 6-62. Refer to “Flow System Provisioning” on page 5-5 for a more complete explanation of flows.

Figure 6-62. Flows Menu

The Flows menu options are shown in Table 6-25.

Table 6-25. Flows Menu Options


1 EVCs This option displays the “EVCs Menu” on page 6-91.

2 Maps This option displays the “Maps Menu” on page 6-95.

3 Profiles This option displays the “Profiles Menu” on page 6-100.

4 Pre-defined flows This option displays the “Quick-Set Menu” on page 6-105.

5 Delete all flows This option deletes all flows from the system.

6 Egress Queue Depths This option displays the “Egress Queue Depths Menu” on page 6-107.



MX3112->Provisioning->Flows

1 - EVCs

2 - Maps

3 - Profiles

4 - Pre-defined flows

5 - Delete all flows

6 - Egress Queue Depths

Selection:

6-90 61189901L1-1B


EVCs MenuThe EVCs menu (see Figure 6-63) displays a summary of all existing EVCs.

Figure 6-63. EVCs Menu

The EVCs menu options are shown in Table 6-26.

When more EVCs exist than can be displayed on one page, hot key options are available for navigating multiple pages. Table 6-27 lists the EVCs menu hot keys.

Table 6-26. EVCs Menu Options


1–4 EVC # This option displays the “Edit EVC Menu” on page 6-93.

5 Add EVC This option displays the “Edit EVC Menu” on page 6-93.Note: This option number increases or decreases by one as each EVC is added or deleted.



MX3112->Provisioning->Flows->EVCs

Page 1 of 1

EVC CE VLAN ID

EVC Alias VID Preservation EVC Port Status

1 - EVC_1 101 Enabled Group 1 Running




5 - Add EVC

Selection:

61189901L1-1B 6-91


Table 6-27. EVCs Menu Hot Keys


N Next page This hot key displays the next page of EVCs.

P Previous page This hot key displays the previous page of EVCs.

F First page This hot key displays the first page of EVCs.

L Last page This hot key displays the last page of EVCs.

D Display This hot key displays different EVC criteria in the menu.

6-92 61189901L1-1B


Edit EVC MenuThe Edit EVC menu (see Figure 6-63) is used to edit the parameters of a selected EVC.

Figure 6-64. Edit EVC Menu

The Edit EVC menu options are shown in Table 6-28.

Table 6-28. Edit EVC Menu Options


1 EVC Alias This option is used to specify the name of the EVC. The value may have a maximum length of 32 characters.

EVC Status This field displays the EVC status. The possible values are listed in Table 6-29.

2 EVC State This option is used to set the user-configurable state of the EVC. Options are as follows:

• Disabled• Enabled

3 EVC Port This option is used to configure the port the EVC is applied to. Options are as follows:

• Ethernet 1–4• Group 1–4• Unspecified

4 EVC VLAN ID This option is used to specify the numerical ID of the CE-VLAN.



MX3112->Provisioning->Flows->EVCs->Edit EVC

1 - EVC Alias : EVC_1

EVC Status : Running

2 - EVC State : Enabled

3 - EVC Port : Group 1

4 - EVC VLAN ID : 1

5 - CE VLAN ID Preservation : Enabled

6 - Maps for this EVC

7 - Delete this EVC

Selection:

61189901L1-1B 6-93


5 CE VLAN ID Preservation This option is used control whether to preserve the CE VLAN tag within the EVC. Options are as follows:


6 Maps for this EVC This option displays the “Maps Menu” on page 6-95 for a specific EVC. Use this option to list, manage, and add maps to the selected EVC.

7 Delete this EVC This option deletes the selected EVC from the system.

Table 6-29. EVC Status Values

Possible Values Definition

Running Conditions are okay and the EVC provisioning is applied.

No Maps Running None of the associated Maps for this EVC are running.

Invalid EVC Port The value of the EVC Port is not specified.

Invalid EVC VID The value of the EVC VID is not within the permissible range.

Duplicate EVC Another EVC exists having the same EVC Port and EVC VID.

Disabled The State value of the EVC is provisioned as Disabled.

VLAN mgmt conflict The EVC VID conflicts with the VID that is actively used for managing the system.

Transparent EVC conflict A condition exists that violates a rule for transparent EVCs.

Table 6-28. Edit EVC Menu Options (Continued)


6-94 61189901L1-1B


Maps MenuThe Maps menu (see Figure 6-65) is used to view and manage all maps within the system.

Figure 6-65. Maps Menu

The Maps menu options are shown in Table 6-30.

When more maps exist than can be displayed on one page, hot key options are available for navigating multiple pages. Table 6-31 lists the Maps menu hot keys.

Table 6-30. Maps Menu Options


1–4 Map # This option displays the “Edit Map Menu” on page 6-97.

5 Add Map This option displays the “Edit Map Menu” on page 6-97.Note: This option number increases or decreases by one as each map is added or deleted.



MX3112->Provisioning->Flows->Maps

Page 1 of 1

Map Alias Ingress Criteria Status

1 - Map_1 Ethernet 1, 10 Running




5 - Add Map

Selection:

61189901L1-1B 6-95


Table 6-31. Maps Menu Hot Keys


N Next page This hot key displays the next page of maps.

P Previous page This hot key displays the previous page of maps.

F First page This hot key displays the first page of maps.

L Last page This hot key displays the last page of maps.


6-96 61189901L1-1B


Edit Map MenuThe Edit Map menu (see Figure 6-66) is used to edit the parameters of a selected map.

Figure 6-66. Edit Map Menu

The Edit Map menu options are shown in Table 6-32.

Table 6-32. Edit Map Menu Options


1 Associated EVC This option is used to select the EVC associated with the selected map.

2 Map Alias This option is used to specify the alphanumeric map alias. The alias is case sensitive with a maximum number of 32 characters.

Map Status This field displays the map status. The possible values are listed in Table 6-33.

3 Map State This option is used to set the user-configurable state of the map. Options are as follows:


4 UNI Port This option is used to select the physical interface connected to the CE. Options are as follows:




MX3112->Quick Setup->Flows->Maps->Edit Map

1 - Associated EVC : EVC_1

2 - Map Alias : Map_1

Map Status : Running

3 - Map State : Enabled

4 - UNI Port : Ethernet 1

5 - CE VLAN ID : 10

CE VLAN P-bits : Unspecified

DSCP value : Unspecified

Untagged, Priority Tagged Frames : Disallow

9 - Class of Service : Inherit from CE VLAN P-bits

10 - Delete this Map

Selection:

61189901L1-1B 6-97


5 CE VLAN ID This option is used to specify the VLAN ID of the outermost VLAN tag of the Ethernet frame received at the UNI port. The valid range is 0–4094.

6 CE VLAN P-bits This option is used to specify a range of P-bit values of the outermost VLAN tag of the Ethernet frame.

7 DSCP Value This option is used to specify the DSCP value of the Ethernet frame received at the UNI port.

8 Untagged, Priority Tagged Frames This option is used to control whether untagged and priority tagged frames are allowed to ingress the UNI port in addition to frames tagged with the specified CE VLAN ID. Options are as follows:

• Disallow• Allow

9 Class of Service This option is used to control how frames associated with the map are prioritized into the EVC. Options are as follows:

• Explicit 0 (BE)• Explicit 1 (BK)• Explicit 2• Explicit 3 (EE)• Explicit 4 (CL)• Explicit 5 (VI)• Explicit 6 (VO)• Explicit 7 (NC)• Inherit from CE VLAN P-bits

10 Delete this Map This option deletes the selected map from the system.

Table 6-33. Map Status Values


Running Conditions are okay and the map provisioning is applied.

No EVC connected The associated EVC is not specified.

EVC not running The associated EVC is specified, but the status of the EVC is not “Running.”

Invalid UNI port The UNI Port is not specified.

Disabled The State value of the map is provisioned as Disabled.

Duplicate Map Another map exists having conflicting ingress criteria.

VLAN mgmt conflict The CE VLAN ID conflicts with the VID that is actively used for managing the system.

Table 6-32. Edit Map Menu Options (Continued)


6-98 61189901L1-1B


Tag option conflict A conflict is present that involves the option for allowing untagged and priority tagged traffic to be received at the UNI Port.

Excess UNIs per EVC Another map having a different UNI port is connected to the same EVC.

UNI Port = EVC Port The UNI port equals the same port as the associated EVC.

Preserve conflict A conflict is present in combination with the CE VLAN ID Preservation attribute of the associated EVC.

Resources unavailable The internal resources needed to apply the map are not available.

Table 6-33. Map Status Values (Continued)


61189901L1-1B 6-99


Profiles MenuThe Profiles menu (see Figure 6-67) displays all bandwidth profiles for the system.

Figure 6-67. Profiles Menu

The Profiles menu options are shown in Table 6-34.

When more profiles exist than can be displayed on one page, hot key options are available for navigating multiple pages. Table 6-31 lists the Profiles menu hot keys.

Table 6-34. Maps Menu Options


1–4 Profile # This option displays the “Edit Profile Menu” on page 6-102.

5 Add Profile This option displays the “Edit Profile Menu” on page 6-102.Note: This option number increases or decreases by one as each profile is added or deleted.



MX3112->Provisioning->Flows->Profiles

Page 1 of 1

Profile Alias Application CIR EIR Status

1 - Profile_1 UNI port 2000 3000 Running

2 - Profile_2 EVC 2500 8000 Running

3 - Profile_3 CE-VLAN CoS 1500 6000 Running

4 - Profile_4 CE-VLAN CoS 4000 6000 Running

5 - Add Profile

Selection:

6-100 61189901L1-1B


Table 6-35. Profiles Menu Hot Keys


N Next page This hot key displays the next page of profiles.

P Previous page This hot key displays the previous page of profiles.

F First page This hot key displays the first page of profiles.

L Last page This hot key displays the last page of profiles.


61189901L1-1B 6-101


Edit Profile MenuThe Edit Profile menu (see Figure 6-68) is used to edit the parameters of a selected profile.

Figure 6-68. Edit Profile Menu

The Edit Profile menu options are shown in Table 6-36.

Table 6-36. Edit Profile Menu Options


1 Profile Alias This option is used to specify an arbitrary string that is used to identify the profile. The value can have a maximum length of 32 characters.

Profile Status This field displays the map status. The possible values are listed in Table 6-37.

2 Profile State This option is used to set the user-configurable state of the profile. Options are as follows:


3 Application This option is used to control how the profile is applied. Options are as follows:

• Not Applied• UNI port• EVC• CE-VLAN CoS• Custom



MX3112->Provisioning->Flows->Profiles->Edit Profile

1 - Profile Alias : Profile_3

Profile Status : Running

2 - Profile State : Enabled

3 - Application : CE-VLAN CoS

4 - EVC of profile : EVC_3

5 - CoS value(s) of profile : 0-4

6 - Rate Coupling : Disabled

7 - Committed Information Rate (kbps) : 1500

8 - Committed Burst Size (bytes) : 3125

9 - Excess Information Rate (kbps) : 6000

10 - Excess Burst Size (bytes) : 12500

11 - Maps for this profile

12 - Delete this profile

Selection:

6-102 61189901L1-1B


4 UNI port of profile or EVC of profile For UNI port of profile, this option is available and meaningful only if the Application is UNI port. Options are as follows:


For EVC of profile, this option is used to select the EVC associated with the selected profile.

5 CoS value(s) of profile This option is available and meaningful only if the Application is CE-VLAN-CoS.

6 Rate Coupling This option is used to control the relationship of the EIR to the CIR. Options are as follows:


7 Committed Information Rate (kbps) This option is used to configure the rate up to which service frames are delivered according to the service performance objectives.

8 Committed Burst Size (bytes) This option is used to configure the maximum available bytes for a burst of ingress traffic sent at the UNI speed while still conforming to the CIR.

9 Excess Information Rate (kbps) This option is used to configure the rate up to which service frames are delivered without any performance objectives.

10 Excess Burst Size (bytes) This option is used to configure the maximum available bytes for a burst of ingress traffic sent at the UNI speed while still conforming to the EIR.

11 Maps for this profile This option displays the “Maps Menu” on page 6-95 for a specific profile. Use this option to list, manage, and add maps to the selected profile.

12 Delete this profile This option deletes the selected profile from the system.

Table 6-37. Profile Status Values


Running Conditions are okay and the profile provisioning is applied.

Invalid UNI Port The UNI Port of the profile is needed for the Application, but it is not specified.

Disabled The State value of the profile is provisioned as Disabled.

Invalid EVC The EVC of the profile is needed for the Application, but it is not specified.

Table 6-36. Edit Profile Menu Options (Continued)


61189901L1-1B 6-103


Duplicate Profile Another profile exists having equal (or conflicting) values for the Application.

Invalid Rate(s) The values for CIR and/or EIR conflict in relation to the Rate Coupling value.

Invalid Application The Application attribute is not specified.

Invalid CoS The CoS of the profile is needed for the Application, but the value is invalid.

Map conflict A condition exists in which a map is applied to more than one profile.

Table 6-37. Profile Status Values (Continued)


6-104 61189901L1-1B


Quick-Set MenuThe Quick-Set menu (see Figure 6-69) is used to set up pre-defined sets of flows.

Figure 6-69. Quick-Set Menu

The Quick-Set menu options are shown in Table 6-38.

Figure 6-70 and Figure 6-71 illustrate the quick-set configurations.

Table 6-38. Quick-Set Menu Options


1 One-to-One Port/Group Mapping with Default EVC VIDs

This option deletes any existing flows and sets up the following configuration (see Figure 6-70).

• Four maps (one for each Ethernet port)• Four EVCs (one for each bonding group)• Four profiles (one for each EVC)

2 One-to-One Port/Group Mapping with Transparent EVCs

This option deletes any existing flows and sets up the following configuration (see Figure 6-71).

• Four maps (one for each Ethernet port)• Four transparent EVCs (one for each bonding

group)• Four profiles (one for each EVC)



MX3112->Provisioning->Flows->Quick-Set

1 - One-to-One Port/Group Mapping with Default EVC VIDs

2 - One-to-One Port/Group Mapping with Transparent EVCs

Warning!!! This operation will delete any existing

flows and will be service-affecting.

The operation may take a moment.

Selection: '?' - System Help Screen

61189901L1-1B 6-105


Figure 6-70. One-to-One Port/Group Mapping with Default EVC VIDs

Figure 6-71. One-to-One Port/Group Mapping with Transparent EVCs

Ethernet 1 EVC 101Bonding Group 1




Ethernet 1 Transparent EVCBonding Group 1




6-106 61189901L1-1B


Egress Queue Depths MenuThe Egress Queue Depths menu (see Figure 6-72) is used to configure the depth of each of the eight egress queues.

Each Ethernet port and bonding group can be viewed as having eight egress queues, one queue for each class of service, where the higher priority queues are serviced before the lower priority queues. For a given Ethernet port or bonding group, the order in which the egress queues are serviced is 76543021 (highest to lowest priority) per IEEE 802.1D-2004.

The depth of each egress queue is configurable in units of Ethernet packets. Each egress queue depth applies across all Ethernet ports and bonding groups in the system.

The configurable egress queue depths allow for a trade-off between the potential latency of bursted packets and the ability to service bursted packets without them being discarded. With higher queue depths, larger bursts of packets can be serviced, but with a potentially higher latency due to the greater amount of time required to empty a full egress queue. With smaller queue depths, bursted packets can have a lower latency but an overall higher probability of being discarded.

Figure 6-72. Egress Queue Depths Menu

The Egress Queue Depths menu options are shown in Table 6-39.

Table 6-39. Egress Queue Depths Menu Options


1–8 Class of Service This option is used to enter the queue depth for the associated CoS.



MX3112->Provisioning->Flows->Egress Queue Depths

Class of Service Queue Depth (packets)

1 - 7 (NC) 50

2 - 6 (VO) 50

3 - 5 (VI) 50

4 - 4 (CL) 50

5 - 3 (EE) 50

6 - 0 (BE) 50

7 - 2 50

8 - 1 (BK) 50


61189901L1-1B 6-107


Ethernet Client Ports MenuThe Ethernet Client Ports menu (see Figure 6-73) is used to view the current settings and access the provisioning options for each Ethernet client port.

Figure 6-73. Ethernet Client Ports Menu

The Ethernet Client Ports menu options are shown in Table 6-40.

Table 6-40. Ethernet Client Port Menu Options


1–4 Ethernet Client Port 1–4 This option displays the “Ethernet Client Ports Provisioning Menu” on page 6-109.



MX3112->Provisioning->Ethernet Client Ports

Cross-

Rate over Link Link State

Port State & Duplex Mode Status Awareness

1 - Enabled Auto(Unknown) Auto Down Disabled





6-108 61189901L1-1B


Ethernet Client Ports Provisioning MenuThe Ethernet Client Ports Provisioning menu (see Figure 6-74) is used to provision the Ethernet state, the provisioned rate and duplex, the cross-over mode, and the link state follows group state for each Ethernet client port.

Figure 6-74. Ethernet Client Ports Provisioning Menu

The Ethernet Client Ports Provisioning menu options are shown in Table 6-41.

Table 6-41. Ethernet Client Ports Provisioning Menu Options


1 Ethernet State This option is used to select the Ethernet state. Options are as follows:

• Disabled: This option disables the client Ethernet port. Link status alarms are suppressed and the Ethernet link for the port is forced down.

• Enabled: This option enables the client Ethernet port.

2 Provisioned Rate & Duplex This option is used to select the rate and duplex. Options are as follows:

• Auto: This option allows auto negotiation of the Ethernet rate and duplex.

• 10, Half• 10, Full• 100, Half• 100, Full



MX3112->Provisioning->Ethernet Client Ports->Port #1

1 - Ethernet State : Enabled

2 - Provisioned Rate & Duplex : Auto

Functional Rate & Duplex : Unknown

3 - Cross-Over Mode : Auto

4 - Link State Awareness : Disabled

Link Status : Down


61189901L1-1B 6-109


Functional Rate & Duplex This field displays the actual data rate of the Ethernet client port.

3 Cross-Over Mode This option is used to select the cross-over mode for the selected Ethernet client port. Options are as fol-lows:

• MDI• MDI-X• Auto

4 Link State Awareness This option is used select the mode that governs the Ethernet state. Options are as follows

• Disabled: The state of the Ethernet port is governed by the Ethernet state option.

• Enabled: The state of the Ethernet port is governed by the Ethernet state option in combination with the status of any associated bonding groups according to the provisioned flows. If the Ethernet state option is enabled, but the bonding groups associated with this port are down (or if there are no associated bonding groups), then the port behaves as though it is disabled (Ethernet link is forced down).

Link Status This read-only field displays the Ethernet client port status as being either Up or Down. The front panel Ethernet link LED also displays this status.

Table 6-41. Ethernet Client Ports Provisioning Menu Options (Continued)


6-110 61189901L1-1B


Equipment Protection MenuThe Equipment Protection menu (see Figure 6-75) is used to perform a manual switch from the active card to the standby card.

CAUTIONPerforming a manual switch briefly interrupts customer data.

Figure 6-75. Equipment Protection Menu

The Equipment Protection menu options are shown in Table 6-42.

Table 6-42. Equipment Protection Menu Options


1 Perform Manual Switch This option is used to perform a manual switch from the active controller card to the standby controller card.



MX3112->Provisioning->Equipment Protection

Active (Card A) : Normal

Standby (Card B) : Not Installed

1 - Perform Manual Switch


61189901L1-1B 6-111


General Provisioning MenuThe General Provisioning menu (see Figure 6-76) is used to provision the craft port baud rate, the date, time, and auto-logoff inactivity time, to reset the MX3112 system, and to restore default provisioning.

CAUTIONIf the baud rate is changed, the rate changes immediately, and the terminal emulation software must be updated to reflect the change.

CAUTIONResetting this card disrupts traffic and causes a switch to the standby card if it is installed.

Figure 6-76. General Provisioning Menu

The General Provisioning menu options are shown in Table 6-43.



MX3112->Provisioning->General

1 - Craft Port Baud Rate : Auto

Functional Baud Rate : 115200

2 - Date : 01/01/2005

3 - Time : 12:00:00

4 - Auto-Logoff Inactivity Time : 15-Min


6 - Scheduled Card Reset : Disabled

7 - Card Reset

8 - Restore Default Provisioning


6-112 61189901L1-1B


Table 6-43. General Provisioning Menu Options


1 Craft Port Baud Rate This option is used to select the craft port baud rate. Options are as follows:

• Auto: This option allows the craft port baud rate to be set automatically.

• Disabled: This option disables the local craft port interface. This allows a Telnet session to disable the craft port.

• 9600• 19200• 38400• 57600• 115200

Functional Baud Rate This field displays the actual craft port baud rate.

2 Date This option is used to enter the date.

3 Time This option is used to enter the time.

4 Auto-Logoff Inactivity Time This option is used to select the amount of inactivity time before the system automatically logs off. Options are as follows:

• Disabled• 1-Min• 5-Min• 10-Min• 15-Min• 30-Min• 45-Min• 60-Min

5 System ID This option is used to enter a 20-character system identification for the unit. The System ID is a user-friendly identification for the MX3112 system that is automatically displayed on the provisioning screen of the COT/GEFM.

6 Scheduled Card Reset This option is used to enter the scheduled card reset date and time. This option is disabled if the scheduled date and time is passed.

7 Card Reset This option is used to perform a manual card reset.

8 Restore Default Provisioning This option is used to restore all provisioning options to the default settings.

61189901L1-1B 6-113


Network Management MenuThe Network Management menu (see Figure 6-77) is used to provision Ethernet information.

CAUTIONChanging IP settings terminates all active Telnet sessions.

Figure 6-77. Network Management Menu

The Network Management menu options are shown in Table 6-44.

Table 6-44. Network Management Menu Options


1 Management Mode This option displays the “Management Mode Menu” on page 6-116.

2 IP Address This option is used to enter the IP Address. The IP Address is written in the format XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX, where each 3-digit field has a value of 000–255.



MX3112->Provisioning->Network Management

1 - Management Mode : VLAN 501, Group 1

2 - IP Address : 10.100.51.95

3 - Subnet Mask : 255.255.255.0

4 - Gateway : 10.100.51.254

MAC Address : 02:01:44:09:00:28

5 - TFTP Server : 0.0.0.0

6 - Rear Ethernet Interface

7 - Network Service Ports

8 - SNMP


6-114 61189901L1-1B


3 Subnet Mask This option is used to enter the subnet mask. A subnet mask reduces the traffic on each subnet-work by confining traffic to only the subnetwork for which it is intended. A subnet mask makes the entire network more manageable. In effect, each subnet functions as though it were an independent network, keeping local traffic local and forwarding traffic to another subnet only if the address of the data is external to the subnet. The subnet mask is written in the format XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX, where each 3-digit field has a value of 000–255.

4 Gateway This option is used to enter the default gateway/router between the internal network and the exter-nal network. The gateway address is written in the format XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX, where each 3-digit field has a value of 000–255.

5 TFTP Server This option is used to enter the address for the remote TFTP server that is used to download code. Contact the network administrator for this address.

6 Rear Ethernet Interface This option displays the “Rear Ethernet Interface Menu” on page 6-118.

7 Network Service Ports This option displays the “Network Service Ports Menu” on page 6-120.

8 SNMP This option displays the “SNMP Menu” on page 6-121.

Table 6-44. Network Management Menu Options (Continued)


61189901L1-1B 6-115


Management Mode MenuThe Management Mode menu (see Figure 6-78) is used to provision the management mode, VLAN ID, and port/group. For additional details on management modes, refer to “Network Management” on page 6-4.

NOTEThe management VID can not equal the source VID or the new VID of any flows.

Figure 6-78. Management Mode Menu

The Management Mode menu options are shown in Table 6-45.

Table 6-45. Management Mode Menu Options


1 Management Mode This option is used to provision the interface from which the system can be managed via Ethernet. Table 6-46 describes the management modes.

2 Management VLAN ID When the management mode is set to VLAN, this option is used to provision the VLAN ID designated for managing the system. The possible values are 1–4094.



MX3112->Provisioning->Network Management->Management Mode

1 - Management Mode : VLAN

Options for VLAN Management

2 - Management VLAN ID : 501

3 - Management Port/Group : Group 1

The Management VID may not equal the source VID or new VID of any flows


6-116 61189901L1-1B


3 Management Port/Group When the management mode is set to VLAN, this option is used select the client Ethernet port or bonding group designated for carrying Ethernet management traffic for the system. Options are as follows:

• Port 1• Port 2• Port 3• Port 4• Group 1• Group 2• Group 3• Group 4

Table 6-46. Management Modes

Option Mode Function

1 Disabled The system cannot be managed via Ethernet. Man-agement connectivity is supported only via craft interface and the dedicated COT-RT menu channel (remote unit only). The chassis Ethernet port is dis-abled.

2 Local Management connectivity is supported via the craft interface, the dedicated COT-RT menu channel (remote unit only), or via Ethernet from the chassis 10/100 Ethernet port.

3 VLAN Management connectivity is supported via the craft interface, the dedicated COT-RT menu channel (remote unit only), or via Ethernet from a VLAN on a designated bonding group or a customer 10/100 port. The chassis Ethernet port is disabled.

Table 6-45. Management Mode Menu Options (Continued)


61189901L1-1B 6-117


Rear Ethernet Interface MenuThe Rear Ethernet Interface menu (see Figure 6-79) is used to provision the provisioned data rate and cross-over mode for the rear Ethernet interface.

Figure 6-79. Rear Ethernet Interface Menu

The Rear Ethernet Interface menu options are shown in Table 6-47.

Table 6-47. Rear Ethernet Interface Menu Options


1 Provisioned Rate & Duplex This option is used to select the data rate and duplex. Options are as follows:

• Auto: This option allows auto negotiation of the Ethernet line speed and duplex.

• 10 Mbps Half Duplex• 10 Mbps Full Duplex• 100 Mbps Half Duplex• 100 Mbps Full Duplex

Functional Rate & Duplex This field displays the actual data rate of the Ethernet port.



MX3112->Provisioning->Network Management->Rear Ethernet Interface

1 - Provisioned Rate & Duplex : Auto

Functional Rate & Duplex : Unknown

2 - Cross-Over Mode : Auto

Link Status : Down


6-118 61189901L1-1B


2 Cross-Over Mode This option is used to select the cross-over mode for the selected Ethernet client port. Options are as follows:

• MDI• MDI-X• Auto

Link Status This read-only field displays the status of the network as being either Up or Down.

Table 6-47. Rear Ethernet Interface Menu Options (Continued)


61189901L1-1B 6-119


Network Service Ports MenuThe Network Service Ports menu (see Figure 6-80) provides the option to enter a secondary port number.

Figure 6-80. Network Service Ports Menu

The Network Service Ports menu option is shown in Table 6-48.

Table 6-48. Network Service Ports Menu Option


1 TL1 Telnet Port This option is used to enter the TCP port number associated with managing the system via TL1, with normal Telnet negotiation operations enabled. The possible values are 1024–65535.

2 TL1 Raw-TCP Port This option is used to enter the TCP port number associated with managing the system via TL1, with normal Telnet negotiation operations disabled. The possible values are 1024–65535.

3 Secondary Telnet Port This option is used to enter an additional port to which a Telnet menu connection can be established. This port is currently no different than the primary port 23.



MX3112->Provisioning->Network Management->Network Service Ports

1 - TL1 Telnet Port : 2000

2 - TL1 Raw-TCP Port : 2001

3 - Secondary Telnet Port : 2002


6-120 61189901L1-1B


SNMP MenuThe SNMP menu (see Figure 6-81) is used to provision the SNMP state and the SNMP traps. This menu is also used to enter information for the system ID, system location, system contact, read community, and write community.

Figure 6-81. SNMP Menu

The SNMP menu option is shown in Table 6-49.

Table 6-49. SNMP Menu Option


1 SNMP State This option is used to enable or disable the SNMP state. Options are as follows:

• Disabled: When disabled, the MX3112 system ignores all incoming SNMP packets and does not transmit SNMP packets.

• Enabled

2 SNMP Traps This option is used to enable or disable the SNMP traps. Options are as follows:


3–6 Trap Host 1–4 This option displays the “Trap Host Menu” on page 6-123.



MX3112->Provisioning->Network Management->SNMP

1 - SNMP State : Disabled

2 - SNMP Traps : Disabled

3 - Trap Host 1 : 172.22.118.242

4 - Trap Host 2

5 - Trap Host 3

6 - Trap Host 4


8 - System Location : SysLocation Not Set

9 - System Contact : www.adtran.com

10 - Read Community : public

11 - Write Community : private


61189901L1-1B 6-121


7 System ID This option provides a user-configurable text string for the name of the MX3112 system. This name distinguishes the MX3112 system among different installations. Up to 20 alphanumeric characters can be entered in this field, including spaces and special characters (such as an underscore).

8 System Location This option provides a user-configurable text string for the location of the MX3112 system. This field is used to identify the physical location of the unit. Up to 55 alphanumeric characters can be entered in this field, including spaces and special characters (such as an underscore).

9 System Contact This option provides a user-configurable text string for a SNMP contact name. This field can be used to enter the name, phone number, or e-mail address of a person responsible for the SNMP. Up to 55 alphanumeric characters can be entered in this field, including spaces and special characters (such as an underscore).

10 Read Community This option is used to enter the authentication strings used for SNMP management. Input a value that matches the MX3112 system to the SNMP manager for read privileges. The SNMP read community name defaults to “public”. Up to 32 alphanumeric characters can be entered in this field, including spaces and special characters (such as an underscore).

11 Write Community This option is used to enter the authentication strings used for SNMP management. Input a value that matches the MX3112 system to the SNMP manager for write privileges. The SNMP write community name defaults to “private”. Up to 32 alphanumeric characters can be entered in this field, including spaces and special characters (such as an underscore).

Table 6-49. SNMP Menu Option (Continued)


6-122 61189901L1-1B


Trap Host MenuThe Trap Host menu (see Figure 6-82) is used to provision the status, the IP, the version, and the confirmation timeout and retries.

Figure 6-82. Trap Host Menu

The Trap Host menu option is shown in Table 6-50.

Table 6-50. Trap Host Menu Option


1 Status This option is used to set the SNMP trap host status. Table 6-51 describes the SNMP trap host states.

2 IP This option is used to enter the IP address of the SNMP manager to which the MX3112 system sends traps.

3 Version This option is used to select the SNMP version to be used for reporting traps to the SNMP manager. Options are as follows:

• Version 1• Version 2



MX3112->Provisioning->Network Management->SNMP->Trap Host 1

1 - Status : Valid

2 - IP : 172.22.118.242

3 - Version : Version 2

4 - Confirmation Timeout (sec) : 3

5 - Confirmation Retries : 0


61189901L1-1B 6-123


4 Confirmation Time (sec) This option is used to set the initial timeout, in sec-onds, for each trap sent to the SNMP manager if confirmations are enabled. On each subsequent retry, the timeout is doubled. The default value is three seconds.

5 Confirmation Retries This option is used to set the maximum number of times that the MX3112 system sends a trap to the host. If set to zero, the MX3112 system disables trap confirmation. If set to a value greater than zero, the MX3112 system enables trap confirmation. The default value is zero.

Table 6-51. Trap Host Status

Option States Function

1 Valid This status is used after the trap host parameters are configured. This enables trap reporting.

2 Under Creation This status is used while the trap host parameters are being configured.

3 Invalid This status is used to disable traps for the specified trap host.

Table 6-50. Trap Host Menu Option (Continued)


6-124 61189901L1-1B


Auto Save MenuThe Auto Save menu (see Figure 6-83) provides the option to save provisioning settings each minute if enabled.

Figure 6-83. Auto Save Menu

The Auto Save menu options are shown in Table 6-52.

Table 6-52. Auto Save Menu Options


1 Disabled This option is used to disable the auto save option.

2 Enabled This option automatically saves current network settings at one minute intervals if any changes are made.



Auto Save : Enabled

1 - Disabled

2 - Enabled

Will Save Provisioning Each Minute If Enabled


61189901L1-1B 6-125


Security Administration MenuThe Security Administration menu (see Figure 6-84) provides access to all user accounts.

Figure 6-84. Security Administration Menu

The Security Administration menu options are shown in Table 6-53.

Table 6-53. Security Administration Menu Options


1 Users Currently Logged On This option displays the “Users Currently Logged On Screen” on page 6-127.

2 Edit User Accounts This option displays the “Edit Accounts Menu” on page 6-128.

3 Access Tech Support Account This option displays the “Access Tech Support Account Screen” on page 6-131.

4 Restore Default Security Settings This option is used to restore all security options to the default settings.



MX3112->Provisioning->Security Administration

1 - Users Currently Logged On

2 - Edit User Accounts

3 - Access Tech Support Account

4 - Restore Default Security Settings


6-126 61189901L1-1B


Users Currently Logged On ScreenThe Users Currently Logged On screen (see Figure 6-85) displays all users currently logged in to the MX3112 system.

Figure 6-85. Users Currently Logged On Screen

The Users Currently Logged On screen fields are shown in Table 6-54.

Table 6-54. Users Currently Logged On Screen Fields

Field Description

Users Currently Logged On This field displays the number of users currently logged on.

USER This field displays the account name.

ACCESS This field displays the access as one of the following:• Craft: User is logged on through the front panel craft port of the

MX3112 Controller Card.• IP: User is logged on through a Telnet connection via the primary

(23) or secondary Telnet port.

TYPE This field displays the type as one of the following:• Menu• TL1 (This option is not available at this time.)

FROM This field displays the IP address if access is IP.

TIME This field displays the logon date and time.



Users Currently Logged On - 1

USER ACCESS TYPE FROM TIME

ADMIN IP Menu 172.22.117.239 01/01/06 12:00:00


61189901L1-1B 6-127


Edit Accounts MenuThe Edit Accounts menu (see Figure 6-86) allows access to manage all user accounts.

Figure 6-86. Edit Accounts Menu

The Edit Accounts menu options are shown in Table 6-55.

The Edit Accounts menu hot key is shown in Table 6-56.

Table 6-57 provides the default account names and passwords for the MX3112 system.

Table 6-55. Edit Accounts Menu Options


1–4 USER This option is used to select the user account to be configured.

Table 6-56. Edit Accounts Menu Hot Key

Hot Key Description Function

N New Account This hot key creates a new user account. Pressing the hot key displays a screen where the new user name can be entered. The new user account can then be selected from the Edit Accounts menu.



MX3112->Provisioning->Security Administration->Edit Accounts

Num USER STATUS NUM LOGINS ACCESS RIGHTS

1. ADMIN ENABLED 1 ADMIN

2. READONLY ENABLED 0 READ

3. READWRITE ENABLED 0 READ/WRITE

4. TEST ENABLED 0 TEST


(N)ew Account

6-128 61189901L1-1B


* The Tech Support Account Level is established and accessed as directed by ADTRAN Technical Support during troubleshooting and analysis.

Table 6-57. Edit User Accounts Menu Options

Account Level Account Name Account Password

READ ONLY READONLY PASSWORD

READ/WRITE READWRITE PASSWORD

TEST TEST PASSWORD

ADMIN ADMIN PASSWORD

TECH SUPPORT* Challenge Key Response Key

61189901L1-1B 6-129


Edit User Account MenuThe Edit User Account menu (see Figure 6-87) is used to edit or delete user accounts.

Figure 6-87. Edit User Account Menu

The Edit User Account menu options are shown in Table 6-58.

Table 6-58. Edit User Account Menu Options


1 Enable/Disable User Account This option is used to enable or disable an user account. Options are as follows:


The ADMIN account can not be disabled.

2 Access Rights This option sets the access rights level for the selected account. Options are as follows:

• READ: This level allows the user to see but not change the current system configuration.

• TEST: This level allows system testing.• READ/WRITE: This level allows the user to both

see and change system configuration parameters.

• ADMIN: This level is reserved for system or network administrators.

3 Change Password This option is used to enter a new password.

4 Delete User This option is used to delete a user account.



MX3112->Provisioning->Security Administration->Edit Accounts->Edit

User: ADMIN

1 - Enable/Disable User Account : ENABLED

2 - Access Rights : ADMIN

3 - Change Password

4 - Delete User


6-130 61189901L1-1B


Access Tech Support Account ScreenThe Access Tech Support Account screen (see Figure 6-88) provides access to a technical support account.

Figure 6-88. Access Tech Support Account Screen

To receive a technical support response key, provide the challenge key that appears on the screen to an authorized Adtran factory representative. Refer to “ADTRAN Technical Support” on page A-1 for contact information. Entry of a valid response key promotes the menu session to the technical support level.



MX3112->Provisioning->Security Administration->Access Tech Support Account

Challenge Key: 865C7382

Enter Response Key:

To receive a Tech Support Account 'Response Key', provide the 'Challenge Key'

shown above to an authorized Adtran factory representative. Entry of a valid

Response Key will promote this menu session to the Tech Support level.


61189901L1-1B 6-131


Quick Setup MenuTo simplify the installation process, all of the basic configuration options necessary to get the MX3112 system running are grouped together on the Quick Setup menu (see Figure 6-89 for copper mode and Figure 6-90 for DS3 mode). The Quick Setup menu allows configuration of such items as application mode and Ethernet client ports, as well as, system date, time, IP address information, and bonding group assignments.

CAUTIONChanging IP settings terminates all active Telnet sessions.

Figure 6-89. Quick Setup Menu - Copper Mode



MX3112->Quick Setup

Application Mode DS1 Port Bonding Group

1 - Application Mode : Copper, COT, DS1 11 - 1 1

Auto Prov Enabled 12 - 2 1

13 - 3 1




17 - 7 3

System 18 - 8 3

4 - Management Mode : Local 19 - 9 3

5 - IP Address : 10.100.51.94 20 - 10 4

6 - Subnet Mask : 255.255.255.0 21 - 11 4

7 - Gateway : 10.100.51.254 22 - 12 4

8 - Date : 04/18/2006

9 - Time : 14:03:15

10 - System ID : MX3112 LOCAL SYSTEM


6-132 61189901L1-1B


Figure 6-90. Quick Setup Menu - DS3 Mode

NOTEFor the List 2 Controller, the Quick Setup menu in DS3 mode displays DS3 tributaries 25–28.

The Quick Setup menu options are shown in Table 6-59.

Table 6-59. Quick Setup Menu Options


1 1 Application Mode This option displays the “Application Mode Menu” on page 6-57

2 2 Select Ethernet Client Ports This option displays the “Ethernet Client Ports Menu” on page 6-108.

3 3 Packet Flows This option displays the “Flows Menu” on page 6-90.



MX3112->Quick Setup

Application Mode DS3 Trib Bonding Group

1 - Application Mode : DS3, COT, DS1 11 - 13 1

Auto Prov Enabled 12 - 14 1

13 - 15 1




17 - 19 3

System 18 - 20 3

4 - Management Mode : Local 19 - 21 3

5 - IP Address : 10.100.51.94 20 - 22 4

6 - Subnet Mask : 255.255.255.0 21 - 23 4

7 - Gateway : 10.100.51.254 22 - 24 4

8 - Date : 04/18/2006

9 - Time : 14:15:42

10 - System ID : MX3112 LOCAL SYSTEM


61189901L1-1B 6-133


4 4 Management Mode This option is used to provision the interface from which Ethernet connectivity is established for managing the system. Options are as follows:

• Disabled: The system cannot be managed through Ethernet. Management connectivity is supported only through the craft interface and the dedicated COT-RT menu channel (remote unit only). The chassis Ethernet port is disabled.

• Local: Management connectivity is supported through the craft interface, the dedicated COT-RT menu channel (remote unit only), or the Ethernet from the chassis 10/100 Ethernet port.

• VLAN: Management connectivity is supported through the craft interface, the dedicated COT-RT menu channel (remote unit only), the Ethernet from a VLAN on a designated bonding group, or a customer 10/100 port. The chassis Ethernet port is disabled.

5 5 IP Address This option is used to enter the IP address. The IP address is written in the format XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX, where each 3-digit field has a value of 000–255.

6 6 Subnet Mask This option is used to enter the subnet mask. A subnet mask reduces the traffic on each subnet-work by confining traffic to only the subnetwork for which it is intended. A subnet mask makes the entire network more manageable. In effect, each subnet functions as though it were an indepen-dent network, keeping local traffic local and for-warding traffic to another subnet only if the address of the data is external to the subnet. The subnet mask is written in the format XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX, where each 3-digit field has a value of 000–255.

7 7 Gateway This option is used to enter the default gateway/router between the internal network and the exter-nal network. The gateway address is written in the format XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX, where each 3-digit field has a value of 000–255.

8 8 Date This option is used to enter the date.

9 9 Time This option is used to enter the time.

10 10 System ID This option is used to enter the system ID.

Table 6-59. Quick Setup Menu Options (Continued)


6-134 61189901L1-1B


11–22

N/A Bonding Group 1–12 This option is used to enter the bonding group assignment for each DS1/E1 port.

• Enter 1 to assign a DS1/E1 port to Bonding Group 1.




• Enter 0 to remove a DS1/E1 from the assigned bonding group.

N/A 11–22

DS3 Tributary 13–24 This option is used to enter the bonding group assignment for each DS3 tributary.





• Enter 0 to remove a DS3 from the assigned bonding group.

When in RT mode and auto provisioning is enabled, the bonding group is automatically con-figured by the COT.For the List 2 Controller, the Quick Setup menu in DS3 mode displays DS3 tributaries 25–28 (options 23–26).

Table 6-59. Quick Setup Menu Options (Continued)


61189901L1-1B 6-135


Status MenuThe Status menu (see Figure 6-91 for copper mode and Figure 6-92 for DS3 mode) provides summarized status information about the major areas of the system. Navigate to submenus to obtain more detailed information.

Figure 6-91. Status Menu - Copper Mode

Figure 6-92. Status Menu - DS3 Mode

The Status menu options are shown in Table 6-60.



MX3112->Status

1 - Controller Equipment 3 - Ethernet Client Ports

Active (Card A) : Normal <1-4> : Down Down Down Down


4 - DS1/E1 Ports

2 - Environmental Alarms <1-4> : LOS LOS LOS LOS

State : Major <5-8> : LOS LOS LOS LOS

<9-12> : LOS LOS LOS LOS

5 - Bonding Group Status

<1-2> : OK N/A

<3-4> : N/A N/A

Timing : Loop

Fan Module

State : Not Installed




MX3112->Status

1 - Controller Equipment 4 - Ethernet Client Ports

Active (Card A) : Normal <1-4> : Down Down Down Down


5 - DS1 Ports

2 - DS3 (DS3 A) <1-4> : LOS LOS LOS LOS

State : DS3-ALARM <5-8> : LOS LOS LOS LOS

Status : LOS OOF DS2-OOF <9-12> : LOS LOS LOS LOS

3 - Environmental Alarms 6 - Bonding Group Status

State : Minor <1-2> : N/A N/A

<3-4> : N/A N/A

Timing : Loop

Fan Module

State : Not Installed


6-136 61189901L1-1B


Table 6-60. Status Menu Options


1 1 Controller Equipment This option displays the “Controller Equipment Screen” on page 6-138.

N/A 2 DS3 This option displays the “DS3 Status Menu - DS3 Mode Only” on page 6-140.

2 3 Environmental Alarms This option displays the “Environmental Alarms Screen” on page 6-144.

3 4 Ethernet Client Ports This option displays the “Ethernet Client Ports Screen” on page 6-146.

4 5 DS1/E1 Ports This option displays the “DS1/E1 Ports Status Screen” on page 6-147.

5 6 Bonding Group Status This option displays the “Bonding Group Status Screen” on page 6-149.

61189901L1-1B 6-137


Controller Equipment ScreenThe Controller Equipment screen (see Figure 6-93) displays the status of the active card, standby card, and alarms.

Figure 6-93. Controller Equipment Screen

The Controller Equipment screen fields are shown in Table 6-61.

Table 6-61. Controller Equipment Screen Fields

Field Description

Active This field displays the status of the active card as shown in Table 6-62.

Standby This field displays the status of the standby card as shown in Table 6-63.

Alarms This field displays the conditions of the alarms as shown in Table 6-64.

Table 6-62. Status for Active Card

Status Description

Normal Indicates normal operating mode.

Software Update Indicates software update in progress.

Max Switches Exceeded Indicates the maximum switching threshold is exceeded.

Card Failure Indicates card failure has occurred.



MX3112->Status->Controller Equipment

Active (Card A) : Normal


Alarms : None


6-138 61189901L1-1B


Table 6-63. Status for Standby Card

Status Description

Ready Indicates card is ready and acting as a backup module.

Not Installed Indicates card is not installed in the designated slot.

Software Update Indicates software update is in progress.

Not Ready Indicates card configuration is in progress.

Not Ready - Code Mismatch

Indicates active card should be reset to run new code.

Comm Failure Indicates modules are not able to communicate with each other.

Card Failure Indicates card has failed and should be replaced.

Table 6-64. Alarm Conditions

Condition Description

None Indicates no alarms.

Card Failure - Active Card Indicates active card has failed.

Card Failure - Standby Card

Indicates standby card has failed.

Switch to Protect Indicates a module switch has occurred.

Comm Failure Indicates the active and standby modules are not able to communicate with each other.

Code Mismatch Indicates code versions on active and standby cards do not match. Reset the active card to run new code.

61189901L1-1B 6-139


DS3 Status Menu - DS3 Mode OnlyThe DS3 Status menu (see Figure 6-94) displays the status for the DS3.

Figure 6-94. DS3 Status Menu - DS3 Mode

The DS3 Status menu fields are shown in Table 6-65.

Table 6-65. DS3 Status Menu Fields - DS3 Mode

Field Description

Alarm This field displays the conditions of the alarms as shown in Table 6-66.

Rx Status This field displays the current status of the network. Possible states are as follows:

• OK• LOS• OOF• AIS• RAI• IDLE

Rx Framing This field displays the network framing type. Types are as follows:• C-bit• M23• Unknown

Rx FEAC This field displays the conditions of the remote system shown in Table 6-67.



MX3112->Status->DS3

DS3

Alarm : LOS OOF Tx Clock Source : Local

Rx Status : LOS OOF Tx Framing : M23

Rx Framing : Unknown Test Status : No Test

Rx FEAC : Unknown

DS2s

<1-7> OOF OOF OOF OOF OOF OOF OOF

DS1 Tributaries in DS3

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

AIS

TEST

1 - Go to Test Menu for DS1s in DS3


6-140 61189901L1-1B


Tx Clock Source This field displays the network clock source. Types are as follows:• Loop• Local

Tx Framing This field displays the network framing type. Types are as follows:• C-bit• M23

Test Status This field displays the current test status of the network. Possible states are as follows:

• No Test• Line Loopback• Digital Loopback• Remote Loopback• Remote ALL T1• Far Requested Line

DS2s 1-7 This field displays the conditions of the seven DS2s as shown in Table 6-68.

Table 6-66. Alarm Conditions


None Indicates no alarms are currently being received.

RAI Indicates the MX3112 system is receiving a Remote Alarm Indication (RAI) (yellow) alarm from the network. This alarm is a signal sent back toward the source of a failed transmit circuit. The X-bits (X1 and X2) are set to zero.

LOS Indicates the MX3112 system has lost the Rx signal.

AIS Indicates the MX3112 system is receiving an Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) (blue) alarm from the network. AIS alarms occur when consecutive 1010s are received in the information bits. This indicates there is a transmission fault located either at the transmitting terminal or upstream from the transmitting terminal.

OOF Indicates the MX3112 system detects a framing loss from the network.

XCV Indicates the MX3112 system is receiving excessive code violations from the network, which are exceeding the threshold set by the XCV Threshold parameter.

IDLE Indicates the MX3112 system detects an idle sequence from the network. Service is immediately available for use.

FEAC Indicates the MX3112 system is receiving an alarm from the far end DS3 system.

Table 6-65. DS3 Status Menu Fields - DS3 Mode (Continued)

Field Description

61189901L1-1B 6-141


Table 6-67. Remote System Conditions


Normal Indicates the far end MX3112 system is not reporting any conditions.

DS3 RAI Indicates the far end unit is receiving a RAI (yellow) alarm from the network. This alarm is a signal sent back toward the source of a failed transmit circuit. The X-bits (X1 and X2) are set to zero.

DS3 LOS Indicates the far end unit has lost the Rx signal.

DS3 AIS Indicates the far end unit is receiving an AIS (blue) alarm condition from the network. AIS alarms occur when consecutive 1010s are received in the information bits. This indicates there is a transmission fault located either at the transmitting terminal or upstream from the transmitting terminal.

DS3 LOF Indicates the far end unit detects a framing loss, Loss of Frame (LOF), from the network.

DS3 Idle Indicates the far end unit detects an idle sequence from the network.

DS3 Eqpt Fail (SA) Indicates the far end unit or network is reporting a service-affecting (SA) DS3 equipment failure.

DS3 Eqpt Fail (NSA) Indicates the far end unit or network is reporting a non-service-affecting (NSA) DS3 equipment failure.

Common Eqpt Fail Indicates the far end unit or network is reporting a non-service-affecting common equipment failure.

Multiple DS1 LOS Indicates the far end unit is experiencing a loss of signal on multiple DS1s.

Single DS1 LOS Indicates the far end unit is experiencing a loss of signal on a single DS1.

DS1 Eqpt Fail (SA) Indicates the far end unit is experiencing a service-affecting DS1 equipment failure.

DS1 Eqpt Fail (NSA) Indicates the far end unit is experiencing a non-service-affecting DS1 equipment failure.

Unknown Indicates the unit is unable to discern the status of the far end unit. This is the normal state for M13 framing.

6-142 61189901L1-1B


The DS3 Status menu option is shown in Table 6-69.

Table 6-68. DS2 Conditions


OK Indicates the DS2 is not receiving alarms.

OOF Indicates the unit detects a framing loss across the DS2.

RAI Indicates the unit is receiving a RAI (yellow) alarm from the network across a DS2. This alarm is a signal sent back toward the source of a failed transmit circuit. The X-bit is set to zero.

AIS Indicates the unit is receiving an AIS (blue) alarm condition from the network across the DS2. AIS alarms occur when the unit receives unframed all ones.

Table 6-69. DS3 Status Menu Option


1 Go to Test Menu for DS1s in DS3 A/B

This option displays the “DS1s in DS3 Menu - DS3 Mode Only” on page 6-160.

61189901L1-1B 6-143


Environmental Alarms ScreenThe Environmental Alarms screen (see Figure 6-95) displays the status of the DS1 ports.

Figure 6-95. Environmental Alarms Screen

The Environmental Alarms screen fields are shown in Table 6-70.

Table 6-70. Environmental Alarms Screen Fields

Field Description

External Inputs This field displays the external inputs as shown in Table 6-71.

Alarm Status This field displays the alarm status as one of the following:• Active• Inactive

Level This field displays the alarm level as one of the following:• Disabled• Info• Alert• Minor• Major• Critical• N/A (ACO Only)



MX3112->Status->Environmental Alarms

External Inputs Alarm Status Level

AUX #1 Input Inactive Major




PWR BUS A Inactive Major

PWR BUS B Active Major

ACO Status Inactive N/A


6-144 61189901L1-1B


Table 6-71. Environmental Alarm External Inputs

External Input Description

AUX #1 Input This input indicates open or closed relay contacts for AUX #1.




PWR BUS A This input generates an alarm signal when power feed A fails. When both power feeds fail, a critical alarm is not generated. A complete power failure at the MX3112 system is detected by communication loss at the attached devices.

PWR BUS B This input generates an alarm signal when power feed B fails. When both power feeds fail, a critical alarm is not generated. A complete power failure at the MX3112 system is detected by communication loss at the attached devices.

ACO Status This field displays the current status of the ACO inputs. This includes the front panel ACO switch and any auxiliary inputs configured as ACO.

61189901L1-1B 6-145


Ethernet Client Ports ScreenThe Ethernet Client Ports screen (see Figure 6-96) displays the current link status and link speed and duplex of each Ethernet client port.

Figure 6-96. Ethernet Client Ports Screen

The Ethernet Client Ports screen fields are shown in Table 6-72.

Table 6-72. Ethernet Client Ports Screen Fields

Field Description

Port This field displays the Ethernet client port number.

Link Status This field displays the current status as either Up or Down.

Link Speed & Duplex This field displays one of the following speeds as active.• 10 Mbps, Half• 100 Mbps, Half• 10 Mbps, Full• 100 Mbps, Full• Unknown



MX3112->Status->Ethernet Client Ports

Port Link Status Link Speed & Duplex

1 Up 100, Full

2 Up 100, Full

3 Up 100, Full

4 Up 100, Full


6-146 61189901L1-1B


DS1/E1 Ports Status ScreenThe DS1/E1 Ports Status screen (see Figure 6-97) displays the test status for each DS1 port.

Figure 6-97. DS1/E1 Ports Status Screen

The DS1/E1 Ports Status screen fields are shown in Table 6-73.

Table 6-73. DS1/E1 Ports Status Screen Fields

Field Description

DS1/E1 Port This field displays the DS1/E1 port number.

Status This field displays the current line status of the DS1/E1 ports. The possible states are as follows:

• OK• CV• AIS• LOS• AUTO• OFF



MX3112->Status->DS1/E1 Ports

DS1 Port Status Test

1 LOS No Test

2 LOS No Test

3 LOS No Test

4 LOS No Test

5 LOS No Test

6 LOS No Test

7 LOS No Test

8 LOS No Test

9 LOS No Test

10 LOS No Test

11 LOS No Test

12 LOS No Test


61189901L1-1B 6-147


Test This field displays the current test status of the DS1/E1 ports. The possible states are as follows:

• No Test• Analog Network• Digital Line• CSU Loopback (DS1 Mode Only)• CSU LB w/ Pattern (DS1 Mode Only)• NIU Loopback (DS1 Mode Only)• NIU LB w/ Pattern (DS1 Mode Only)• Pattern Test (DS1 Mode Only)• Far Requested Analog Net

Table 6-73. DS1/E1 Ports Status Screen Fields (Continued)

Field Description

6-148 61189901L1-1B


Bonding Group Status ScreenThe Bonding Group Status screen (see Figure 6-98 for copper mode and Figure 6-99 for DS3 mode) displays the current status for each DS1/E1 bonding group and each DS1/E1 port.

Figure 6-98. Bonding Group Status Screen - Copper Mode

Figure 6-99. Bonding Group Status Screen - DS3 Mode



MX3112->Status->Bonding Groups

| Unbonded | Group 1 | Group 2 | Group 3 | Group 4

| | OK | OK | OK | OK

| | Skew Thrs=4 | Skew Thrs=4 | Skew Thrs=4 | Skew Thrs=4

DS1 | | | | |

Port | Status | Status Skew | Status Skew | Status Skew | Status Skew

1 | | OK 0.0 | | |

2 | | OK 0.0 | | |

3 | | OK 0.0 | | |

4 | | | OK 0.0 | |

5 | | | OK 0.0 | |

6 | | | OK 0.0 | |

7 | | | | OK 0.0 |

8 | | | | OK 0.0 |

9 | | | | OK 0.0 |

10 | | | | | OK 0.0

11 | | | | | OK 0.0

12 | | | | | OK 0.0

Relative skew is displayed in milliseconds. '?' - System Help Screen



MX3112->Status->Bonding Groups

| Unbonded | Group 1 | Group 2 | Group 3 | Group 4

| | OK | OK | OK | OK

| | Skew Thrs=4 | Skew Thrs=4 | Skew Thrs=4 | Skew Thrs=4

DS3 | | | | |

Trib | Status | Status Skew | Status Skew | Status Skew | Status Skew

13 | | OK 0.0 | | |

14 | | OK 0.0 | | |

15 | | OK 0.0 | | |

16 | | | OK 0.0 | |

17 | | | OK 0.0 | |

18 | | | OK 0.0 | |

19 | | | | OK 0.0 |

20 | | | | OK 0.0 |

21 | | | | OK 0.0 |

22 | | | | | OK 0.0

23 | | | | | OK 0.0

24 | | | | | OK 0.0

Relative skew is displayed in milliseconds. '?' - System Help Screen

61189901L1-1B 6-149


NOTEFor the List 2 Controller, the DS1 Bonding Group Status screen in DS3 mode displays DS3 tributaries 25–28. The additional tributar-ies are displayed by using the hot keys listed in Table 6-76.

The Bonding Group Status screen fields are shown in Table 6-74.

The Bonding Group Status screen hot keys are shown in Table 6-76.

Table 6-74. Bonding Group Status Screen Fields

Field Description

Group 1–4 This field displays the status of each bonding group as shown in Table 6-75.

Skew Thrs This field displays the provisioned skew threshold (in milliseconds) for the bonding group.

DS1/E1 Status This field displays the possible states in order of precedence of each DS1/E1 port as shown in Table 6-77.

Skew Status This field displays the relative skew value of each DS1/E1 in a bonded group. “N/A” is displayed if an error condition prevents calculation.

Table 6-75. Bonding Group States

Status Description

N/A Indicates no DS1/E1s are bonded to this group.

OK Indicates the status of all DS1/E1s bonded to a group is OK.

PARTIAL Indicates an error condition exists on all but at least one of the DS1/E1s in a bonded group.

DOWN Indicates an error condition exists on all of the DS1/E1s in a bonded group.

Table 6-76. Bonding Group Status Screen Hot Keys - DS3 Mode




6-150 61189901L1-1B


Table 6-77. DS1/E1 Port States

Status Description

OK Indicates the DS1/E1 is okay (no anomalies).

SKEW Indicates the measured skew for the DS1/E1 exceeds the provisioned threshold.

NO SYNC Indicates loss of synchronization at the DS1/E1 interface of the bonding engine with the far end system.

FE FAIL Indicates a problem is detected at the far end system.

CRC Indicates coding violations are detected, with a rate below the provisioned threshold.

LOF Indicates loss of frame.

XCV Indicates coding violations are detected, with a rate in excess of the provisioned threshold.

RAI Indicates a Remote Alarm Indication (RAI) is received.

TEST Indicates a loopback is activated on this system.

DISABLE Indicates the state option of the DS1/E1 is provisioned as disabled.

NE OOS Indicates the DS1/E1 state is provisioned out-of-service on the main system.

FE OOS Indicates the DS1/E1 state is provisioned out-of-service on the far end system.

LINK ID Indicates a link ID mismatch is detected on the DS1 (the received value is not equal to the expected value).

LPBK Indicates an external loopback is detected on the DS1.

61189901L1-1B 6-151


Test MenuThe Test menu (see Figure 6-100 for copper mode and Figure 6-101 for DS3 mode) provides options for testing the DS1/E1 ports.

Figure 6-100. Test Menu - Copper Mode

Figure 6-101. Test Menu - DS3 Mode

The Test menu options are shown in Table 6-78.



MX3112->Test

DS1 Ports

1 - # 1 : No Test 14 - Test Alarm Relays

2 - # 2 : No Test 15 - Reset ALL Tests

3 - # 3 : No Test 16 - Test Timeout : 5 minutes

4 - # 4 : No Test 17 - Pattern : QRSS

5 - # 5 : No Test

6 - # 6 : No Test

7 - # 7 : No Test

8 - # 8 : No Test

9 - # 9 : No Test

10 - #10 : No Test

11 - #11 : No Test

12 - #12 : No Test

13 - Bonding DS1s




MX3112->Test

DS1 Ports

1 - # 1 : No Test 14 - DS3 : No Test

2 - # 2 : No Test

3 - # 3 : No Test 15 - DS1s in DS3 : No Test

4 - # 4 : No Test

5 - # 5 : No Test 16 - Test Alarm Relays

6 - # 6 : No Test 17 - Reset ALL Tests

7 - # 7 : No Test 18 - Test Timeout : 5 minutes

8 - # 8 : No Test 19 - Pattern : QRSS

9 - # 9 : No Test

10 - #10 : No Test

11 - #11 : No Test

12 - #12 : No Test

13 - Bonding DS1s


6-152 61189901L1-1B


Table 6-78. Test Menu Options


1–12 1–12 DS1/E1 Ports #1 - #12 This option displays the “DS1/E1 Port Test Menu” on page 6-154.

13 N/A Bonding DS1/E1s This option displays the “Bonding DS1/E1s Menu - Copper Mode Only” on page 6-156.

N/A 13 Bonding DS1s This option displays the “Bonding DS1s Menu - DS3 Mode Only” on page 6-157.

N/A 14 DS3 This option displays the “DS3 Test Menu - DS3 Mode Only” on page 6-159.

N/A 15 DS1s in DS3 This option displays the “DS1s in DS3 Menu - DS3 Mode Only” on page 6-160.

14 16 Test Alarm Relays This option displays the “Test Alarm Relays Menu” on page 6-163.

15 17 Reset ALL Tests This option is used to cancel all test and return all test to data mode.

16 18 Test Timeout This option is used to select the test timeout. Options are as follows:

• Disabled• 1 minute• 5 minutes• 10 minutes• 15 minutes• 30 minutes• 45 minutes• 60 minutes

17 19 Pattern This option is used to select the test pattern used by the internal BERT. Options are as follows:

• QRSS• ALL ONES• ALL ZEROS• 2 IN 8 (2:6)• 1 IN 8 (1:7)• 2^15-1 INV

61189901L1-1B 6-153


DS1/E1 Port Test MenuThe DS1/E1 Port Test menu (see Figure 6-102) provides testing options that can be run on the DS1 ports.

CAUTIONEnabling a test interrupts customer payload on the selected DS1/E1 port.

Figure 6-102. DS1/E1 Port Test Menu

The DS1/E1 Port Test menu options are shown in Table 6-79.

Table 6-79. DS1/E1 Port Test Menu Options


1 No Test When this mode is selected, no test are active and the customer payload is uninterrupted.

2 Analog Network This test activates a DS1 loopback toward the DS3 in DS3 mode or the DSX-1 line interface in copper mode.

3 Digital Line This test activates a DS1 loopback toward the DSX-1 line interface.

4 CSU Loopback (DS1 Mode Only) This test sends CSU loop up commands towards the DSX-1 line.



DS1/E1 Port #1 Test : No Test

1 - No Test

2 - Analog Network

3 - Digital Line

4 - CSU Loopback

5 - CSU LB w/ Pattern

6 - NIU Loopback

7 - NIU LB w/ Pattern

8 - Pattern Test


6-154 61189901L1-1B


5 CSU LB w/ Pattern (DS1 Mode Only)

This test sends CSU loop up commands towards the DSX-1 line and sends test patterns using the internal BERT.

6 NIU Loopback (DS1 Mode Only) This test sends NIU loop up commands towards the DSX-1 line.

7 NIU LB w/ Pattern (DS1 Mode Only) This test sends NIU loop up commands towards the DSX-1 line and sends test patterns using the internal BERT.

8 Pattern Test (DS1 Mode Only) This test sends test patterns using the internal BERT.

Table 6-79. DS1/E1 Port Test Menu Options (Continued)


61189901L1-1B 6-155


Bonding DS1/E1s Menu - Copper Mode OnlyThe Bonding DS1/E1s menu (see Figure 6-103) is used to select the type of test to be performed on each DS1/E1 port.

Figure 6-103. Bonding DS1/E1s Menu - Copper Mode

The Bonding DS1/E1s menu options are shown in Table 6-80.

Table 6-80. Bonding DS1/E1s Menu Options - Copper Mode


1–12 DS1/E1 Port 1–12 This option is used to select the type of test to be performed. Table 6-81 shows a description of each test.

Table 6-81. Bonded DS1/E1 Tests

Test Description

No Test No test is activated.

Line This test activates a DS1/E1 loopback toward the DS3 in DS3 mode or the DSX-1 line interface in copper mode. All data is looped back, including framing and payload data.

Payload This test activates a DS1/E1 loopback toward the DS3 in DS3 mode or the DSX-1 line interface in copper mode. The payload data is looped back, whereas the framing is regenerated.



MX3112->Test->Bonding DS1s

DS1 Port Test

1 - 1 No Test

2 - 2 No Test

3 - 3 No Test

4 - 4 No Test

5 - 5 No Test

6 - 6 No Test

7 - 7 No Test

8 - 8 No Test

9 - 9 No Test

10 - 10 No Test

11 - 11 No Test

12 - 12 No Test


6-156 61189901L1-1B


Bonding DS1s Menu - DS3 Mode OnlyThe Bonding DS1s menu (see Figure 6-104) is used to select the test to be performed on each DS3 tributary.

CAUTIONEnabling a test on a DS3 interrupts customer payload on all DS1s transported over the DS3.

Figure 6-104. Bonding DS1s Menu - DS3 Mode

NOTEFor the List 2 Controller, the Bonding DS1s menu displays DS3 tributaries 25–28.

The Bonding DS1s menu options are shown in Table 6-82.

Table 6-82. Bonding DS1s Menu Options - DS3 Mode


1–12 DS3 Trib 13–24 This option is used to select the type of test to be performed. Table 6-83 shows a description of each test.



MX3112->Test->Bonding DS1s

DS3 Trib Test

1 - 13 No Test

2 - 14 No Test

3 - 15 No Test

4 - 16 No Test

5 - 17 No Test

6 - 18 No Test

7 - 19 No Test

8 - 20 No Test

9 - 21 No Test

10 - 22 No Test

11 - 23 No Test

12 - 24 No Test


61189901L1-1B 6-157


Table 6-83. DS1 Tributary Tests

Test Description

No Test No test is activated.

Line This test activates a DS1 loopback toward the DS3. All data is looped back, including framing and payload data.

Payload This test activates a DS1 loopback toward the DS3. The payload data is looped back, whereas the framing is regenerated.

6-158 61189901L1-1B


DS3 Test Menu - DS3 Mode OnlyThe DS3 Test menu (see Figure 6-105) provides testing options that can be run on the DS3.

CAUTIONEnabling a test on a DS3 interrupts customer payload on all DS1s transported over the DS3.

Figure 6-105. DS3 Test Menu - DS3 Mode

The DS3 Test menu options are shown in Table 6-84.

Table 6-84. DS3 Test Menu Options - DS3 Mode



2 Line Loopback This test loops towards the DS3 line but excludes the DS3 framer.

3 Digital Loopback This test loops the DS3 toward the DS1 tributaries.

4 Remote Loopback (C-bit Only) This test performs a line loopback at the equipment on the other end of the DS3.

5 Remote ALL T1 (C-bit Only) This test performs a tributary loopback on all DS1s in the DS3 at the equipment on the other end of the DS3.



DS3 Test : No Test

1 - No Test

2 - Line Loopback

3 - Digital Loopback

4 - Remote Loopback

5 - Remote ALL T1


61189901L1-1B 6-159


DS1s in DS3 Menu - DS3 Mode OnlyThe DS1s in DS3 menu (see Figure 6-106) displays the selected test for each of the tributaries.

Figure 6-106. DS1s in DS3 Menu - DS3 Mode

The DS1s in DS3 menu options are shown in Table 6-85.

Table 6-85. DS1s in DS3 Menu Options - DS3 Mode


1–28 DS1 Ports 1–28 This option displays the “DS1 in DS3 Test Menu - DS3 Mode Only” on page 6-161.



MX3112->Test->DS1s in DS3

1 - No Test 15 - No Test















6-160 61189901L1-1B


DS1 in DS3 Test Menu - DS3 Mode OnlyThe DS1 in DS3 Test menu (see Figure 6-107) provides testing options that can be run on each tributary.

Figure 6-107. DS1 in DS3 Test Menu - DS3 Mode

The DS1 in DS3 Test menu options are shown in Table 6-86.

Table 6-86. DS1 in DS3 Test Menu Options - DS3 Mode



2 Tributary Loopback This test activates a DS1 loopback toward the DS3.

3 Remote Loopback This test performs a tributary loopback on the selected DS1 in the DS3 terminated at the connecting equipment.

4 Remote Loopback w/ Pattern This test activates a remote loopback at the far end system, and then, generates a test pattern toward that loopback.

5 CSU Loopback This test sends CSU loop up commands towards the DSX-1 line.

6 CSU LB w/ Pattern This test sends CSU loop up commands towards the DSX-1 line and sends test patterns using the internal BERT.



DS1 #1 in DS3 Test : No Test

1 - No Test

2 - Tributary Loopback

3 - Remote Loopback

4 - Remote Loopback w/ Pattern

5 - CSU Loopback

6 - CSU LB w/ Pattern

7 - NIU Loopback

8 - NIU LB w/ Pattern

9 - Pattern Test


61189901L1-1B 6-161


7 NIU Loopback This test sends NIU loop up commands towards the DSX-1 line.

8 NIU LB w/ Pattern This test sends NIU loop up commands towards the DSX-1 line and sends test patterns using the internal BERT.

9 Pattern Test This test sends test patterns using the internal BERT.

Table 6-86. DS1 in DS3 Test Menu Options - DS3 Mode (Continued)


6-162 61189901L1-1B


Test Alarm Relays MenuThe Test Alarm Relays menu with the Alarm Relay Test Status option set to Inactive is shown in Figure 6-108. Figure 6-109 shows the Test Alarm Relays menu with the Alarm Relay Test Status option is set to Active.

Figure 6-108. Test Alarm Relays Menu (Alarm Relay Test Status = Inactive)

Figure 6-109. Test Alarm Relays Menu (Alarm Relay Test Status = Active)



MX3112->Test->Test Alarm Relays

1 - Alarm Relay Test Status : Inactive




MX3112->Test->Test Alarm Relays

1 - Alarm Relay Test Status : Active

2 - Toggle Critical Relay : Active

3 - Toggle Major Relay : Active

4 - Toggle Minor Relay : Active

5 - Toggle All Relays


61189901L1-1B 6-163


The Test Alarm Relays menu options are shown in Table 6-87.

Table 6-87. Test Alarm Relays Menu Options

Option Field Description

1 Alarm Relay Test Status This option is used to enable or disable the alarm relay test. Options are as follows:

• Inactive: Test is disabled.• Active: Test is enabled. Options 2–5 are visible

when this option is selected.

2 Toggle Critical Relay This option is a toggle key to change between Inactive and Active status.

3 Toggle Major Relay This option is a toggle key to change between Inactive and Active status.

4 Toggle Minor Relay This option is a toggle key to change between Inactive and Active status.

5 Toggle All Relays This option is a toggle key to change between Inactive and Active status for all alarm relays at once.

6-164 61189901L1-1B


Performance Monitoring MenuThe Performance Monitoring menu (see Figure 6-110 for copper mode and Figure 6-111 for DS3 mode) allows access to all performance monitoring options.

Figure 6-110. Performance Monitoring Menu - Copper Mode

Figure 6-111. Performance Monitoring Menu - DS3 Mode

The Performance Monitoring menu options are shown in Table 6-88.



MX3112->PM

1 - DS1/E1 Port Statistics

2 - DS1/E1 Bonding Statistics

3 - Bonding Group Statistics

4 - Ethernet Client Statistics

5 - Reset ALL Current Interval PM Data

6 - Reset ALL PM Data

7 - Reset ALL PM Thresholds to Defaults

8 - Enable ALL PM Thresholds

9 - Disable ALL PM Thresholds




MX3112->PM

1 - DS3 Statistics

2 - DS1/E1 Port Statistics

3 - DS1/E1 Bonding Statistics

4 - Bonding Group Statistics

5 - Ethernet Client Statistics

6 - Reset ALL Current Interval PM Data

7 - Reset ALL PM Data

8 - Reset ALL PM Thresholds to Defaults

9 - Enable ALL PM Thresholds

10 - Disable ALL PM Thresholds


61189901L1-1B 6-165


Table 6-88. Performance Monitoring Menu Options


N/A 1 DS3 Statistics This option displays the “DS3 Stats Menu - DS3 Mode Only” on page 6-167.

1 2 DS1/E1 Port Statistics This option displays the “DS1/E1 Port Stats Menu” on page 6-179.

2 3 DS1/E1 Bonding Statistics This option displays the “DS1/E1 Bonding Stats Menu” on page 6-185.

3 4 Bonding Group Statistics This option displays the “Bonding Group Stats Menu” on page 6-200.

4 5 Ethernet Client Statistics This option displays the “Ethernet Stats Menu” on page 6-206.

5 6 Reset ALL Current Interval PM Data

This option resets all current interval performance monitoring data.

6 7 Reset ALL PM Data This option resets all performance monitoring data.

7 8 Reset ALL PM Thresholds to Defaults

This option resets all performance monitoring thresholds to the defaults.

8 9 Enable ALL PM Thresholds This option enables all performance monitoring thresholds.

9 10 Disable ALL PM Thresholds This option disables all performance monitoring thresholds.

6-166 61189901L1-1B


DS3 Stats Menu - DS3 Mode OnlyThe DS3 Stats menu (see Figure 6-112) allows access to view all DS3 performance monitoring statistics and thresholds.

Figure 6-112. DS3 Stats Menu - DS3 Mode

The DS3 Stats menu options are shown in Table 6-89.

Table 6-89. DS3 Stats Menu Options - DS3 Mode

Option Description Field

1 Near End Daily This option displays the “Near End Daily Screen” on page 6-170.

2 Near End Quarter Hourly This option displays the “Near End Quarter Hourly Menu” on page 6-171.

3 Far End Daily This option displays the “Far End Daily Screen” on page 6-172.

4 Far End Quarter Hourly This option displays the “Far End Quarter Hourly Menu” on page 6-173.

5 Near End Daily Thresholds This option displays the “Near End Thresholds Menu” on page 6-175.

6 Near End Quarter Hourly Thresholds

This option displays the “Near End Thresholds Menu” on page 6-175.

7 Far End Daily Thresholds This option displays the “Far End Thresholds Menu” on page 6-177.



MX3112->PM->DS3 Stats

1 - Near End Daily

2 - Near End Quarter Hourly

3 - Far End Daily

4 - Far End Quarter Hourly

5 - Near End Daily Thresholds

6 - Near End Quarter Hourly Thresholds

7 - Far End Daily Thresholds

8 - Far End Quarter Hourly Thresholds

9 - Reset DS3 Current Interval PM Data

10 - Reset DS3 PM Data


61189901L1-1B 6-167


Table 6-90 provides descriptions for the DS3 near end parameters used in the sub-level menus and screens. Table 6-91 provides descriptions for the DS3 far end parameters used in the sub-level menus and screens. The CP-bit parameter descriptions apply to C-bit framing only. This includes the near end CVCP-P, ESCP-P, SESCP-P, and UASCP-P, and the far end CVCP-PFE, ESCP-PFE, SESCP-PFE, and UASCP-PFE. “N/A” is displayed for these parameters when M13 framing is selected.

8 Far End Quarter Hourly Thresholds This option displays the “Far End Thresholds Menu” on page 6-177.

9 Reset DS3 Current Interval PM Data

This option resets the DS3 current interval PM data.

10 Reset DS3 PM Data This option resets the DS3 PM data.

Table 6-90. DS3 Near End Parameter Descriptions

Parameter Definition Description

CV-L Code Violation - Line This parameter indicates the number of Bipolar Violations (BPVs) and Excessive Zeros (EXZs) that have occurred.

ES-L Errored Second - Line This parameter indicates the number of seconds in which one or more Coding Violations (CVs) or one or more Loss-of-Signal (LOS) defects occurred.

SES-L Severely Errored Second - Line

This parameter indicates the number of seconds with 45 or more BPVs and EXZs, or one or more LOS defects.

LOSS-L Loss of Signal Second - Line

This parameter indicates the number of seconds for which one or more LOS defects occurred.

CVP-P Code Violation, P-bit Parity - Path

This parameter indicates the number of P-bit parity errors that have occurred. This count is not incremented when Unavailable Seconds (UASP-P) are counted.

ESP-P Errored Second, P-bit Parity - Path

This parameter indicates the number of seconds with one or more P-bit parity errors, one or more SEF defects, or one or more Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) defects. This count is not incremented when UASP-P are counted.

SESP-P Severely Errored Second, P-bit Parity - Path

This parameter indicates the number of seconds with 45 or more P-bit parity errors, one or more SEF defects, or one ore more AIS defects. This count is not incremented when UASP-P are counted.

UASP-P Unavailable Second, P-bit Parity - Path

This parameter indicates the number of seconds that the DS3 path is unavailable. UASP-P accumulates at the onset of 10 contiguous SESP-Ps and stops accumulating at the onset of 10 contiguous seconds without SESP-Ps.

Table 6-89. DS3 Stats Menu Options - DS3 Mode (Continued)


6-168 61189901L1-1B


CVCP-P Code Violation, CP-bit Parity - Path

This parameter indicates the number of CP-bit parity errors that have occurred. This count is not incremented when UASCP-P are counted.

ESCP-P Errored Second, CP-bit Parity - Path

This parameter indicates the number of seconds with one or more CP-bit parity errors, one or more SEF defects, or one or more AIS defects. This count is not incremented when UASCP-P are counted.

SESCP-P Severely Errored Second, CP-bit Parity - Path

This parameter indicates the number of seconds with 45 or more CP-bit parity errors, one or more SEF defects, or one or more AIS defects. This count is not incremented when UASCP-P are counted.

UASCP-P Unavailable Second, CP-bit Parity - Path

This parameter indicates the number of seconds that the DS3 path is unavailable. UASCP-P accumulates at the onset of 10 contiguous SESCP-Ps and stops accumulating at the onset of 10 contiguous seconds without SESCP-Ps.

Table 6-91. DS3 Far End Parameter Descriptions


CVCP-PFE Code Violation, CP-bit Parity - Path

This parameter indicates the number of CP-bit parity errors that have occurred. This count is not incremented when UAS are counted.

ESCP-PFE Errored Second, CP-bit Parity - Path

This parameter indicates the number of seconds with one or more CP-bit parity errors, one or more SEF defects, or one or more Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) defects. This count is not incremented when UASCP-PFE are counted.

SESCP-PFE Severely Errored Second, CP-bit Parity - Path

This parameter indicates the number of seconds with 45 or more CP-bit parity errors, one or more SEF defects, or one or more AIS defects. This count is not incremented when UASCP-PFE are counted.

UASCP-PFE Unavailable Second, CP-bit Parity - Path

This parameter indicates the number of seconds that the DS3 path is unavailable. UASP-PFE accumulates at the onset of 10 contiguous SESCP-PFEs and stops accumulating at the onset of 10 contiguous seconds without SESCP-PFEs.

Table 6-90. DS3 Near End Parameter Descriptions (Continued)


61189901L1-1B 6-169


Near End Daily ScreenThe Near End Daily screen (see Figure 6-113) provides statistics that are maintained for the current 24-hour period and the seven previous days.

Figure 6-113. Near End Daily Screen

Table 6-90 on page 168 provides definitions for the parameters used on the Near End Daily screen.



MX3112->PM->DS3 Stats->Near End Daily

Current 01/01 01/02 01/03 01/04 01/05 01/06 01/07

CV-L : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

ES-L : 43 60 60 60 60 60 60 60

SES-L : 43 60 60 60 60 60 60 60

LOSS-L : 43 60 60 60 60 60 60 60

CVP-P : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

ESP-P : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

SESP-P : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

UASP-P : 43 60 60 60 60 60 60 60

CVCP-P : n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

ESCP-P : n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

SESCP-P : n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

UASCP-P : n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a


6-170 61189901L1-1B


Near End Quarter Hourly MenuThe Near End Quarter Hourly menu (see Figure 6-114) provides statistics that are maintained for the current 15-minute interval and the completed 96 previous 15-minute intervals. Each option on the Near End Quarter Hourly menu displays a 24-hour history in 15 minute intervals (see Figure 6-115).

Figure 6-114. Near End Quarter Hourly Menu

Table 6-90 on page 168 provides definitions for the parameters used on the Near End Quarter Hourly menu.

Figure 6-115. 24-Hour History Screen

Card: Controller A ADTRAN MX3112 System 01/01/05 13:30


MX3112->PM->DS3 Stats->Near End Quarter Hourly

Current 13:30 13:15 13:00 12:45 12:30 12:15 12:00

1 - CV-L : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

2 - ES-L : 3 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

3 - SES-L : 3 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

4 - LOSS-L : 3 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

5 - CVP-P : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

6 - ESP-P : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

7 - SESP-P : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

8 - UASP-P : 3 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

9 - CVCP-P : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

10 - ESCP-P : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

11 - SESCP-P : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

12 - UASCP-P : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0




MX3112->PM->DS3 Stats->Near End Quarter Hourly->CV-L

09:45 0 05:30 0 01:15 0 21:00 0 16:45 0 12:30 0

09:30 0 05:15 0 01:00 0 20:45 0 16:30 0 12:15 0

09:15 0 05:00 0 00:45 0 20:30 0 16:15 0 12:00 0

09:00 0 04:45 0 00:30 0 20:15 0 16:00 0 11:45 0

08:45 0 04:30 0 00:15 0 20:00 0 15:45 0 11:30 0

08:30 0 04:15 0 00:00 0 19:45 0 15:30 0 11:15 0

08:15 0 04:00 0 23:45 0 19:30 0 15:15 0 11:00 0

08:00 0 03:45 0 23:30 0 19:15 0 15:00 0 10:45 0

07:45 0 03:30 0 23:15 0 19:00 0 14:45 0 10:30 0

07:30 0 03:15 0 23:00 0 18:45 0 14:30 0 10:15 0

07:15 0 03:00 0 22:45 0 18:30 0 14:15 0 10:00 0

07:00 0 02:45 0 22:30 0 18:15 0 14:00 0 09:45 0

06:45 0 02:30 0 22:15 0 18:00 0 13:45 0

06:30 0 02:15 0 22:00 0 17:45 0 13:30 0

06:15 0 02:00 0 21:45 0 17:30 0 13:15 0

06:00 0 01:45 0 21:30 0 17:15 0 13:00 0

05:45 0 01:30 0 21:15 0 17:00 0 12:45 0

61189901L1-1B 6-171


Far End Daily ScreenThe Far End Daily screen (see Figure 6-116) provides statistics that are maintained for the current 24-hour period and the seven previous days.

NOTEThese statistics do not apply if the DS3 framing is set to M23.

Figure 6-116. Far End Daily Screen

Table 6-91 on page 169 provides definitions for the parameters used on Far End Daily screen.



MX3112->PM->DS3 Stats->Far End Daily

Current 01/01 01/02 01/03 01/04 01/05 01/06 01/07

CVCP-PFE : n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

ESCP-PFE : n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

SESCP-PFE : n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

UASCP-PFE : n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a


6-172 61189901L1-1B


Far End Quarter Hourly MenuThe Far End Quarter Hourly menu (see Figure 6-117) provides statistics that are maintained for the current 15-minute interval and the completed 96 previous 15-minute intervals. Each option on the Far End Quarter Hourly menu displays a 24-hour history in 15 minute intervals (see Figure 6-118).

NOTEThese statistics do not apply if the DS3 framing is set to M23.

Figure 6-117. Far End Quarter Hourly Menu

Table 6-91 on page 169 provides definitions for the parameters used on Far End Quarter Hourly menu.



MX3112->PM->DS3 Stats->Far End Quarterly Hourly

Current 14:00 13:45 13:30 13:15 13:00 12:45 12:30

1 - CVCP-PFE : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

2 - ESCP-PFE : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

3 - SESCP-PFE : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

4 - UASCP-PFE : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0


61189901L1-1B 6-173





MX3112->PM->DS3 Stats->Far End Quarterly Hourly->CVCP-PFE

10:15 0 06:00 0 01:45 0 21:30 0 17:15 0 13:00 0

10:00 0 05:45 0 01:30 0 21:15 0 17:00 0 12:45 0

09:45 0 05:30 0 01:15 0 21:00 0 16:45 0 12:30 0

09:30 0 05:15 0 01:00 0 20:45 0 16:30 0 12:15 0

09:15 0 05:00 0 00:45 0 20:30 0 16:15 0 12:00 0

09:00 0 04:45 0 00:30 0 20:15 0 16:00 0 11:45 0

08:45 0 04:30 0 00:15 0 20:00 0 15:45 0 11:30 0

08:30 0 04:15 0 00:00 0 19:45 0 15:30 0 11:15 0

08:15 0 04:00 0 23:45 0 19:30 0 15:15 0 11:00 0

08:00 0 03:45 0 23:30 0 19:15 0 15:00 0 10:45 0

07:45 0 03:30 0 23:15 0 19:00 0 14:45 0 10:30 0

07:30 0 03:15 0 23:00 0 18:45 0 14:30 0 10:15 0

07:15 0 03:00 0 22:45 0 18:30 0 14:15 0

07:00 0 02:45 0 22:30 0 18:15 0 14:00 0

06:45 0 02:30 0 22:15 0 18:00 0 13:45 0

06:30 0 02:15 0 22:00 0 17:45 0 13:30 0

06:15 0 02:00 0 21:45 0 17:30 0 13:15 0

6-174 61189901L1-1B


Near End Thresholds MenuThe Near End Thresholds menu (see Figure 6-119) is used to select the parameter then set the threshold to the desired level and enable or disable the alarm to be issued once the threshold is exceeded. Figure 6-119 is an example of the menu that is displayed for the Near End Daily Thresholds menu and the Near End Quarter Hourly Thresholds menu.

Figure 6-119. Near End Thresholds Menu

The Near End Thresholds menu options are shown in Table 6-92.

Table 6-92. Near End Thresholds Menu Options


1–12 Near End Parameters (refer to Table 6-90 on page 168 for definitions)

These options display the “Threshold and Alarm Menu” on page 6-176.

13 Reset ALL DS3 PM Thresholds to Defaults

This option resets all DS3 PM thresholds to the factory defaults.

14 Enable ALL DS3 PM Thresholds This option enables all DS3 PM thresholds.

15 Disable ALL DS3 PM Thresholds This option disables all DS3 PM thresholds.



MX3112->PM->DS3 Stats->Near End Daily Thresholds

Threshold Alarm

1 - CV-L : 3865 Disabled

2 - ES-L : 250 Disabled

3 - SES-L : 40 Disabled

4 - LOSS-L : 20 Disabled

5 - CVP-P : 3820 Disabled

6 - ESP-P : 250 Disabled

7 - SESP-P : 40 Disabled

8 - UASP-P : 10 Disabled

9 - CVCP-P : 3820 Disabled

10 - ESCP-P : 250 Disabled

11 - SESCP-P : 40 Disabled

12 - UASCP-P : 10 Disabled

13 - Reset ALL DS3 PM Thresholds to Defaults

14 - Enable ALL DS3 PM Thresholds

15 - Disable ALL DS3 PM Thresholds


61189901L1-1B 6-175


Threshold and Alarm MenuThe Threshold and Alarm menu (see Figure 6-120) is used to set the threshold to the desired level and enable or disable the alarm to be issued once the threshold is exceeded. Figure 6-120 is an example of the menu that is displayed for all of the DS3 near end parameters.

Figure 6-120. Threshold and Alarm Menu

The Threshold and Alarm menu options are shown in Table 6-93.

Table 6-93. Threshold and Alarm Menu Options


1 Threshold This option is used to enter the desired threshold.

2 Alarm This option is used to enable or disable the alarm to be issued once the threshold is exceeded.



MX3112->PM->DS3 Stats->Near End Daily Thresholds->CV-L

1 - CV-L Threshold : 3865

2 - CV-L Alarm : Disabled


6-176 61189901L1-1B


Far End Thresholds MenuThe Far End Thresholds menu (see Figure 6-121) is used to select the parameter then set the threshold to the desired level and enable or disable the alarm to be issued once the threshold is exceeded. Figure 6-121 is an example of the menu that is displayed for the Far End Daily Thresholds menu and the Far End Quarter Hourly Thresholds menu.

Figure 6-121. Far End Thresholds Menu

The Far End Thresholds menu options are shown in Table 6-94.

Table 6-94. Far End Thresholds Menu Options


1–12 Far End Parameters (refer to Table 6-91 on page 169 for definitions)


13 Reset ALL DS3 PM Thresholds to Defaults

This option resets all DS3 PM thresholds to the factory defaults.

14 Enable ALL DS3 PM Thresholds This option enables all DS3 PM thresholds.

15 Disable ALL DS3 PM Thresholds This option disables all DS3 PM thresholds.



MX3112->PM->DS3 Stats->Far End Daily Thresholds

Threshold Alarm

1 - CVCP-PFE : 3820 Disabled

2 - ESCP-PFE : 250 Disabled

3 - SESCP-PFE : 40 Disabled

4 - UASCP-PFE : 10 Disabled

5 - Reset ALL DS3 PM Thresholds to Defaults

6 - Enable ALL DS3 PM Thresholds

7 - Disable ALL DS3 PM Thresholds


61189901L1-1B 6-177


Threshold and Alarm MenuThe Threshold and Alarm menu (see Figure 6-122) is used to set the threshold to the desired level and enable or disable the alarm to be issued once the threshold is exceeded. Figure 6-120 is an example of the menu that is displayed for all of the DS3 far end parameters.









MX3112->PM->DS3 Stats->Far End Daily Thresholds->CVCP-PFE

1 - CVCP-PFE Threshold : 3820

2 - CVCP-PFE Alarm : Disabled


6-178 61189901L1-1B


DS1/E1 Port Stats MenuThe DS1 Port Stats menu (see Figure 6-123) allows access to DS1/E1 port statistics.

Figure 6-123. DS1/E1 Port Stats Menu

The DS1/E1 Port Stats menu options are shown in Table 6-96.

Table 6-96. DS1/E1 Port Stats Menu Options


1–12 DS1/E1 #1 - #12 [PM Data] This option displays the “DS1/E1 # Port Stats Menu” on page 6-180.

13 Reset ALL DS1/E1 Port Current Interval PM Data

This option resets current interval performance monitoring data for all DS1/E1 ports.

14 Reset ALL DS1/E1 Port PM Data This option resets all performance monitoring data for all DS1/E1 ports.

15 Reset ALL DS1/E1 Port Thresholds This option resets thresholds for all DS1/E1 ports.

16 Enable ALL DS1/E1 Port Thresholds

This option enables thresholds for all DS1/E1 ports.

17 Disable ALL DS1/E1 Port Thresholds

This option disables thresholds for all DS1/E1 ports.



MX3112->PM->DS1 Port Stats

1 - DS1 # 1 [PM Data] 13 - Reset ALL DS1 Port Current Interval PM Data

2 - DS1 # 2 [PM Data] 14 - Reset ALL DS1 Port PM Data

3 - DS1 # 3 [PM Data]

4 - DS1 # 4 [PM Data] 15 - Reset ALL DS1 Port Thresholds

5 - DS1 # 5 [PM Data] 16 - Enable ALL DS1 Port Thresholds

6 - DS1 # 6 [PM Data] 17 - Disable ALL DS1 Port Thresholds

7 - DS1 # 7 [PM Data]

8 - DS1 # 8 [PM Data]

9 - DS1 # 9 [PM Data]

10 - DS1 #10 [PM Data]

11 - DS1 #11 [PM Data]

12 - DS1 #12 [PM Data]


61189901L1-1B 6-179


DS1/E1 # Port Stats MenuThe DS1/E1 # Port Stats menu (see Figure 6-124) is used to view all performance monitoring statistics for the selected DS1/E1 port.

Figure 6-124. DS1/E1 # Port Stats Menu

The DS1/E1 # Port Stats menu options are shown in Table 6-97.

Table 6-98 provides descriptions for the near end parameters used in the sub-level menus and screens.

Table 6-97. DS1/E1 # Port Stats Menu Options







5 Reset DS1/E1 # Current Interval PM Data

This option resets the current interval PM data for the selected DS1/E1.

6 Reset DS1/E1 # PM Data This option resets the PM data for the selected DS1/E1.



MX3112->PM->DS1 Port Stats->DS1 #1

1 - Near End Daily




5 - Reset DS1 #1 Current Interval PM Data

6 - Reset DS1 #1 PM Data


6-180 61189901L1-1B





Table 6-98. Near End Parameter Descriptions


CV-L Code Violation - Line This parameter indicates the number of Bipolar Violations (BPVs) that have occurred.

ES-L Errored Second - Line This parameter indicates the number of seconds for which one or more Coding Violations (CVs), or one or more Loss of Signal (LOS) defects occurred.

SES-L Severely Errored Second - Line

This parameter indicates the number of seconds with 1544 or more BPVs or one or more LOS defects.

LOSS-L Loss of Signal Second - Line

This parameter indicates the number of seconds for which one or more LOS defects occurred.



MX3112->PM->DS1 Port Stats->DS1 #1->Near End Daily

Current 01/01 01/02 01/03 01/04 01/05 01/06 01/07

CV-L : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

ES-L : 27 60 60 60 60 60 60 60

SES-L : 27 60 60 60 60 60 60 60

LOSS-L : 28 60 60 60 60 60 60 60


61189901L1-1B 6-181




Table 6-98 on page 181 provides definitions for the parameters used on the Near End Quarter Hourly Menu menu.




MX3112->PM->DS1 Port Stats->DS1 #1->Near End Quarter Hourly

Current 11:30 11:15 11:00 10:45 10:30 10:15 10:00

1 - CV-L : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

2 - ES-L : 1 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

3 - SES-L : 1 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

4 - LOSS-L : 1 10 10 10 10 10 10 10




MX3112->PM->DS1 Port Stats->DS1 #1->Near End Quarter Hourly->CV-L

11:45 0 07:30 0 03:15 0 23:00 0 18:45 0 14:30 0

11:30 0 07:15 0 03:00 0 22:45 0 18:30 0 14:15 0

11:15 0 07:00 0 02:45 0 22:30 0 18:15 0 14:00 0

11:00 0 06:45 0 02:30 0 22:15 0 18:00 0 13:45 0

10:45 0 06:30 0 02:15 0 22:00 0 17:45 0 13:30 0

10:30 0 06:15 0 02:00 0 21:45 0 17:30 0 13:15 0

10:15 0 06:00 0 01:45 0 21:30 0 17:15 0 13:00 0

10:00 0 05:45 0 01:30 0 21:15 0 17:00 0 12:45 0

09:45 0 05:30 0 01:15 0 21:00 0 16:45 0 12:30 0

09:30 0 05:15 0 01:00 0 20:45 0 16:30 0 12:15 0

09:15 0 05:00 0 00:45 0 20:30 0 16:15 0 12:00 0

09:00 0 04:45 0 00:30 0 20:15 0 16:00 0 11:45 0

08:45 0 04:30 0 00:15 0 20:00 0 15:45 0

08:30 0 04:15 0 00:00 0 19:45 0 15:30 0

08:15 0 04:00 0 23:45 0 19:30 0 15:15 0

08:00 0 03:45 0 23:30 0 19:15 0 15:00 0

07:45 0 03:30 0 23:15 0 19:00 0 14:45 0

6-182 61189901L1-1B









5 Reset selected DS1/E1 Thresholds to Defaults

This option resets thresholds to the factory defaults for the selected DS1/E1.

6 Enable selected DS1/E1 Thresholds

This option enables thresholds for the selected DS1/E1.

7 Disable selected DS1/E1 Thresholds

This option disables thresholds for the selected DS1/E1.



MX3112->PM->DS1 Port Stats->DS1 #1->Near End Daily Thresholds

Threshold Alarm

1 - CV-L : 133400 Disabled

2 - ES-L : 648 Disabled

3 - SES-L : 100 Disabled

4 - LOSS-L : 2 Disabled

5 - Reset selected DS1/E1 Thresholds to Defaults

6 - Enable selected DS1/E1 Thresholds

7 - Disable selected DS1/E1 Thresholds


61189901L1-1B 6-183


Threshold and Alarm MenuThe Threshold and Alarm menu (see Figure 6-129) is used to set the threshold to the desired level and enable or disable the alarm to be issued once the threshold is exceeded. Figure 6-129 is an example of the menu that is displayed for the near end parameters.









MX3112->PM->DS1 Port Stats->DS1 #1->Near End Daily Thresholds->CV-L

1 - CV-L Threshold : 133400

2 - CV-L Alarm : Disabled


6-184 61189901L1-1B


DS1/E1 Bonding Stats MenuThe DS1/E1 Bonding Stats menu (see Figure 6-130 and Figure 6-131) allows access to the DS1/E1 bonding statistics.

Figure 6-130. DS1/E1 Bonding Stats Menu - Copper Mode

Figure 6-131. DS1 Bonding Stats Menu - DS3 Mode



MX3112->PM->DS1 Bonding Stats

1 - DS1 # 1 [PM Data] 13 - Reset ALL DS1 Bonding Current Interval PM Data

2 - DS1 # 2 [PM Data] 14 - Reset ALL DS1 Bonding PM Data

3 - DS1 # 3 [PM Data]

4 - DS1 # 4 [PM Data] 15 - Reset ALL DS1 Bonding Thresholds

5 - DS1 # 5 [PM Data] 16 - Enable ALL DS1 Bonding Thresholds

6 - DS1 # 6 [PM Data] 17 - Disable ALL DS1 Bonding Thresholds

7 - DS1 # 7 [PM Data]

8 - DS1 # 8 [PM Data]

9 - DS1 # 9 [PM Data]

10 - DS1 #10 [PM Data]

11 - DS1 #11 [PM Data]

12 - DS1 #12 [PM Data]




MX3112->PM->DS1 Bonding Stats

1 - Trib #13 [PM Data] 13 - Reset ALL DS1 Bonding Current Interval PM Data

2 - Trib #14 [PM Data] 14 - Reset ALL DS1 Bonding PM Data

3 - Trib #15 [PM Data]

4 - Trib #16 [PM Data] 15 - Reset ALL DS1 Bonding Thresholds

5 - Trib #17 [PM Data] 16 - Enable ALL DS1 Bonding Thresholds

6 - Trib #18 [PM Data] 17 - Disable ALL DS1 Bonding Thresholds








61189901L1-1B 6-185


NOTEFor the List 2 Controller, the DS1 Bonding Stats menu in DS3 mode displays DS3 tributaries 25–28.

The DS1/E1 Bonding Stats menu options are shown in Table 6-101.

Table 6-101. DS1/E1 Bonding Stats Menu Options


1–12 N/A DS1/E1 1–12 (PM Data) This option displays the “DS1/E1 # Bonding Stats Menu - Copper Mode Only” on page 6-187.

N/A 1–12 Trib 13~24 (PM Data) This option displays the “DS1 Tributary # Bonding Stats Menu - DS3 Mode Only” on page 6-189.

13 13 Reset ALL DS1/E1 Bonding Current Interval PM Data

This option resets all DS1/E1 bonding current interval performance monitoring data.

14 14 Reset ALL DS1/E1 Bonding PM Data

This option resets all DS1/E1 bonding performance monitoring data.

15 15 Reset ALL DS1/E1 Bonding Thresholds

This option resets all DS1/E1 bonding thresholds.

16 16 Enable ALL DS1/E1 Bonding Thresholds

This option enables all DS1/E1 bonding thresholds.

17 17 Disable ALL DS1/E1 Bonding Thresholds

This option disables all DS1/E1 bonding thresholds.

6-186 61189901L1-1B


DS1/E1 # Bonding Stats Menu - Copper Mode OnlyThe DS1/E1 # Bonding Stats menu (see Figure 6-132) is used to view the performance monitoring statistics for each DS1/E1.

Figure 6-132. DS1/E1 # Bonding Stats Menu - Copper Mode

The DS1/E1 # Bonding Stats menu options are shown in Table 6-102.

Table 6-102. DS1/E1 # Bonding Stats Menu Options - Copper Mode












MX3112->PM->DS1 Bonding Stats->DS1 #1

1 - Near End Daily


3 - Far End Daily






9 - Reset DS1 #1 Current Interval PM Data

10 - Reset DS1 #1 PM Data


61189901L1-1B 6-187



9 Reset DS1/E1 # Current Interval PM Data

This option resets the current interval performance monitoring data for the selected DS1/E1.

10 Reset DS1/E1 # PM Data This option resets the performance monitoring data for the selected DS1/E1.

Table 6-102. DS1/E1 # Bonding Stats Menu Options - Copper Mode (Continued)


6-188 61189901L1-1B


DS1 Tributary # Bonding Stats Menu - DS3 Mode OnlyThe DS1 Tributary # Bonding Stats menu (see Figure 6-133) is used to view the performance monitoring statistics for each DS1 tributary.

Figure 6-133. DS1 Tributary # Bonding Stats Menu - DS3 Mode

The DS1 Tributary # Bonding Stats menu options are shown in Table 6-103.

Table 6-103. DS1 Tributary # Bonding Stats Menu Options - DS3 Mode












MX3112->PM->DS1 Bonding Stats->Trib #13

1 - Near End Daily


3 - Far End Daily






9 - Reset Trib #13 Current Interval PM Data

10 - Reset Trib #13 PM Data


61189901L1-1B 6-189


Table 6-104 provides descriptions for the near end parameters used in the sub-level menus and screens. Table 6-105 provides descriptions for the far end parameters used in the sub-level menus and screens.


9 Reset Trib # Current Interval PM Data

This option resets the current interval performance monitoring data for the selected tributary.

10 Reset Trib # PM Data This option resets the performance monitoring data for the selected tributary.

Table 6-104. Near End Parameter Descriptions


CV-P Coding Violations - Path SF Mode: This parameter indicates the number of frame synchronization bit errors that have occurred during the accumulation period.ESF Mode: This parameter indicates the number of CRC-6 errors that have occurred during the accumula-tion period.

ES-P Errored Seconds - Path SF Mode: This parameter indicates the number of seconds containing any of the following:

• FE (Frame bit Error): This parameter indicates the occurrence of a frame bit error in the received frame bit pattern.

• CS (Controlled Slip) Event: This parameter indicates the replication of deletion of the 192 payload bits of a DS1 frame by the receiving unit.

• SEF (Severely Errored Frame) Defect: This parameter indicates that two or more frame bit errors are detected in a window.

• AIS (Alarm Indication Signal) Defect: This parameter indicates the detection of an unframed signal with a 1s density of at least 99.9% for a time.

ESF Mode: This parameter indicates the number of sec-onds containing any of the following:

• CRC-6 (Cyclic Redundancy Check) Error: This parameter indicates the existence of a CRC-6 code that is not identical to the corresponding locally calculated code.

• CS Event• SEF Defect• AIS Defect

Table 6-103. DS1 Tributary # Bonding Stats Menu Options - DS3 Mode (Continued)


6-190 61189901L1-1B


Note: The parameters in this table are defined for ESF mode only. The parameters are not defined for SF mode.

SES-P Severely Errored Seconds - Path

SF Mode: This parameter indicates the number of seconds with 8 or more FE events or one or more SEF or AIS defects.ESF Mode: This parameter indicates the number of sec-onds with 320 or more CRC-6 errors or one or more SEF or AIS defects.

UAS-P Unavailable Seconds - Path

This parameter indicates the number of seconds for which the DS1 path contains 10 contiguous SESs.

Table 6-105. Far End Parameter Descriptions


CV-PFE Coding Violations - Path This parameter indicates the number of far end CVs, based on PRM bits G1-G6, that have occurred during the accumulation period. CV-PFE counts are inhibited if PRM bit G6 equals 1.

ES-PFE Errored Seconds - Path This parameter indicates the number of one-second intervals containing a RAI signal or an 1 in any of the following PRM bits: G1-G6, SE, or SL = 1.

SES-PFE Severely Errored Seconds - Path

This parameter indicates the number of one-second intervals containing an 1 in the following PRM bits: G1 and SE.

UAS-PFE Unavailable Seconds - Path

This parameter indicates the number of one-second intervals for which the DS1 path is unavailable. UAS-PFE accumulates at the onset of ten contiguous SES-PFE and stops accumulating at the onset of ten contiguous seconds without SES-PFE.

Table 6-104. Near End Parameter Descriptions (Continued)


61189901L1-1B 6-191







MX3112->PM->DS1 Bonding Stats->Trib #13->Near End Daily

Current 01/01 01/02 01/03 01/04 01/05 01/06 01/07

CV-P : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

ES-P : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

SES-P : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

UAS-P : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0


6-192 61189901L1-1B




Table 6-104 on page 190 provides definitions for the parameters used on the Near End Quarter Hourly menu.




MX3112->PM->DS1 Bonding Stats->Trib #13->Near End Quarter Hourly

Current 13:15 13:00 12:45 12:30 12:15 12:00 11:45

1 - CV-P : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

2 - ES-P : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

3 - SES-P : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

4 - UAS-P : 707 899 900 900 899 900 899 900




MX3112->PM->DS1 Bonding Stats->Trib #13->Near End Quarter Hourly->CV-P

13:30 0 09:15 0 05:00 0 00:45 0 20:30 0 16:15 0

13:15 0 09:00 0 04:45 0 00:30 0 20:15 0 16:00 0

13:00 0 08:45 0 04:30 0 00:15 0 20:00 0 15:45 0

12:45 0 08:30 0 04:15 0 00:00 0 19:45 0 15:30 0

12:30 0 08:15 0 04:00 0 23:45 0 19:30 0 15:15 0

12:15 0 08:00 0 03:45 0 23:30 0 19:15 0 15:00 n/a

12:00 0 07:45 0 03:30 0 23:15 0 19:00 0 14:45 n/a

11:45 0 07:30 0 03:15 0 23:00 0 18:45 0 14:30 n/a

11:30 0 07:15 0 03:00 0 22:45 0 18:30 0 14:15 n/a

11:15 0 07:00 0 02:45 0 22:30 0 18:15 0 14:00 n/a

11:00 0 06:45 0 02:30 0 22:15 0 18:00 0 13:45 n/a

10:45 0 06:30 0 02:15 0 22:00 0 17:45 0 13:30 n/a

10:30 0 06:15 0 02:00 0 21:45 0 17:30 0

10:15 0 06:00 0 01:45 0 21:30 0 17:15 0

10:00 0 05:45 0 01:30 0 21:15 0 17:00 0

09:45 0 05:30 0 01:15 0 21:00 0 16:45 0

09:30 0 05:15 0 01:00 0 20:45 0 16:30 0

61189901L1-1B 6-193


Far End Daily ScreenThe Far End Daily screen (see Figure 6-137) provides statistics that are maintained for the current 24-hour period and the seven previous days.

Figure 6-137. Far End Daily Screen

Table 6-105 on page 191 provides definitions for the parameters used on the Far End Daily screen.



MX3112->PM->DS1 Bonding Stats->Trib #13->Far End Daily

Current 01/01 01/02 01/03 01/04 01/05 01/06 01/07

CV-PFE : n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

ES-PFE : n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

SES-PFE : n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

UAS-PFE : n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a


6-194 61189901L1-1B


Far End Quarter Hourly MenuThe Far End Quarter Hourly menu (see Figure 6-138) provides statistics that are maintained for the current 15-minute interval and the completed 96 previous 15-minute intervals. Each option on the Far End Quarter Hourly menu displays a 24-hour history in 15 minute intervals (see Figure 6-139).

Figure 6-138. Far End Quarter Hourly Menu

Table 6-105 on page 191 provides definitions for the parameters used on the Far End Quarter Hourly menu.




MX3112->PM->DS1 Bonding Stats->Trib #13->Far End Quarter Hourly

Current 13:45 13:30 13:15 13:00 12:45 12:30 12:15

1 - CV-PFE : n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

2 - ES-PFE : n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

3 - SES-PFE : n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

4 - UAS-PFE : n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a




MX3112->PM->DS1 Bonding Stats->Trib #13->Far End Quarter Hourly->CV-PFE

14:00 n/a 09:45 n/a 05:30 n/a 01:15 n/a 21:00 n/a 16:45 n/a

13:45 n/a 09:30 n/a 05:15 n/a 01:00 n/a 20:45 n/a 16:30 n/a

13:30 n/a 09:15 n/a 05:00 n/a 00:45 n/a 20:30 n/a 16:15 n/a

13:15 n/a 09:00 n/a 04:45 n/a 00:30 n/a 20:15 n/a 16:00 n/a

13:00 n/a 08:45 n/a 04:30 n/a 00:15 n/a 20:00 n/a 15:45 n/a

12:45 n/a 08:30 n/a 04:15 n/a 00:00 n/a 19:45 n/a 15:30 n/a

12:30 n/a 08:15 n/a 04:00 n/a 23:45 n/a 19:30 n/a 15:15 n/a

12:15 n/a 08:00 n/a 03:45 n/a 23:30 n/a 19:15 n/a 15:00 n/a

12:00 n/a 07:45 n/a 03:30 n/a 23:15 n/a 19:00 n/a 14:45 n/a

11:45 n/a 07:30 n/a 03:15 n/a 23:00 n/a 18:45 n/a 14:30 n/a

11:30 n/a 07:15 n/a 03:00 n/a 22:45 n/a 18:30 n/a 14:15 n/a

11:15 n/a 07:00 n/a 02:45 n/a 22:30 n/a 18:15 n/a 14:00 n/a

11:00 n/a 06:45 n/a 02:30 n/a 22:15 n/a 18:00 n/a

10:45 n/a 06:30 n/a 02:15 n/a 22:00 n/a 17:45 n/a

10:30 n/a 06:15 n/a 02:00 n/a 21:45 n/a 17:30 n/a

10:15 n/a 06:00 n/a 01:45 n/a 21:30 n/a 17:15 n/a

10:00 n/a 05:45 n/a 01:30 n/a 21:15 n/a 17:00 n/a

61189901L1-1B 6-195









5 Reset selected Trib Thresholds to Defaults

This option resets thresholds to the factory defaults for the selected tributary.

6 Enable selected Trib Thresholds This option enables thresholds for the selected tributary.

7 Disable selected Trib Thresholds This option disables thresholds for the selected tributary.



MX3112->PM->DS1 Bonding Stats->Trib #13->Near End Daily Thresholds

Threshold Alarm

1 - CV-P : 132960 Disabled

2 - ES-P : 648 Disabled

3 - SES-P : 100 Disabled

4 - UAS-P : 10 Disabled

5 - Reset selected Trib Thresholds to Defaults

6 - Enable selected Trib Thresholds

7 - Disable selected Trib Thresholds


6-196 61189901L1-1B


Threshold and Alarm MenuThe Threshold and Alarm menu (see Figure 6-141) is used to set the threshold to the desired level and enable or disable the alarm to be issued once the threshold is exceeded. Figure 6-141 is an example of the menu that is displayed for all of the DS1 tributary near end parameters.









MX3112->PM->DS1 Bonding Stats->Trib #13->Near End Daily Thresholds->CV-P

1 - CV-P Threshold : 132960

2 - CV-P Alarm : Disabled


61189901L1-1B 6-197


Far End Thresholds MenuThe Far End Thresholds menu (see Figure 6-142) is used to select the parameter then set the threshold to the desired level and enable or disable the alarm to be issued once the threshold is exceeded. Figure 6-142 is an example of the menu that is displayed for the Far End Daily Thresholds menu and the Far End Quarter Hourly Thresholds menu.

Figure 6-142. Far End Thresholds Menu

The Far End Thresholds menu options are shown in Table 6-108.

Table 6-108. Far End Thresholds Menu Options


1–4 Far End Parameters (refer to Table 6-105 on page 191 for definitions)


5 Reset selected Trib Thresholds to Defaults

This option resets thresholds to the factory defaults for the selected tributary.

6 Enable selected Trib Thresholds This option enables thresholds for the selected tributary.

7 Disable selected Trib Thresholds This option disables thresholds for the selected tributary.



MX3112->PM->DS1 Bonding Stats->Trib #13->Far End Daily Thresholds

Threshold Alarm

1 - CV-PFE : 132960 Disabled

2 - ES-PFE : 648 Disabled

3 - SES-PFE : 100 Disabled

4 - UAS-PFE : 10 Disabled

5 - Reset selected Trib Thresholds to Defaults

6 - Enable selected Trib Thresholds

7 - Disable selected Trib Thresholds


6-198 61189901L1-1B


Threshold and Alarm MenuThe Threshold and Alarm menu (see Figure 6-143) is used to set the threshold to the desired level and enable or disable the alarm to be issued once the threshold is exceeded. Figure 6-143 is an example of the menu that is displayed for all of the DS1 tributary far end parameters.









MX3112->PM->DS1 Bonding Stats->Trib #13->Far End Daily Thresholds->CV-PFE

1 - CV-PFE Threshold : 132960

2 - CV-PFE Alarm : Disabled


61189901L1-1B 6-199


Bonding Group Stats MenuThe Bonding Group Stats menu (see Figure 6-144) is used to access performance monitoring statistics for all bonding groups.

Figure 6-144. Bonding Group Stats Menu

The Bonding Group Stats menu options are shown in Table 6-110.

Table 6-110. Bonding Group Stats Menu Options


1–4 Bonding Group 1–4 This option displays the “Bonding Group # Stats Menu” on page 6-201.

5 Reset ALL Bonding Group Current Interval PM Data

This option resets current interval performance monitoring data for all bonding groups.

6 Reset ALL Bonding Group PM Data This option resets performance monitoring data for all bonding groups.

7 Reset ALL Bonding Group Thresholds

This option resets thresholds for all bonding groups.

8 Enable ALL Bonding Group Thresholds

This option enables thresholds for all bonding groups.

9 Disable ALL Bonding Group Thresholds

This option disables thresholds for all bonding groups.



MX3112->PM->Bonding Group Stats

1 - Bonding Group 1

2 - Bonding Group 2

3 - Bonding Group 3

4 - Bonding Group 4

5 - Reset ALL Bonding Group Current Interval PM Data

6 - Reset ALL Bonding Group PM Data

7 - Reset ALL Bonding Group Thresholds

8 - Enable ALL Bonding Group Thresholds

9 - Disable ALL Bonding Group Thresholds


6-200 61189901L1-1B


Bonding Group # Stats MenuThe Bonding # Group Stats menu (see Figure 6-145) is used to view statistics for each bonding group.

Figure 6-145. Bonding Group # Stats Menu

The Bonding Group # Stats menu options are shown in Table 6-111.

Table 6-112 provides descriptions for the bonding group parameters used in the sub-level menus and screens.

Table 6-111. Bonding Group # Stats Menu Options


1 Daily Performance This option displays the “Daily Performance Screen” on page 6-202.

2 Quarter Hourly Performance This option displays the “Quarter Hourly Performance Menu” on page 6-203.

3 Daily Thresholds This option displays the “Thresholds Menu” on page 6-204.

4 Quarter Hourly Thresholds This option displays the “Thresholds Menu” on page 6-204.

5 Reset Bonding Group # Current Interval PM Data

This option resets current interval performance monitoring data for the selected bonding group.

6 Reset Bonding Group # PM Data This option resets performance monitoring data for the selected bonding group.



MX3112->PM->Bonding Group Stats->Group #1

1 - Daily Performance

2 - Quarter Hourly Performance

3 - Daily Thresholds

4 - Quarter Hourly Thresholds

5 - Reset Bonding Group #1 Current Interval PM Data

6 - Reset Bonding Group #1 PM Data


61189901L1-1B 6-201


Daily Performance ScreenThe Daily Performance screen (see Figure 6-146) provides statistics that are maintained for the current 24-hour period and the seven previous days.

Figure 6-146. Daily Performance Screen

Table 6-112 on page 202 provides definitions for the parameters used on the Daily Perfor-mance screen.

Table 6-112. Bonding Group Parameter Descriptions

Parameter Description

Rx Frames Indicates the total number of frames received in a bonding group.

Rx Bytes Indicates the total number of bytes received in a bonding group.

Rx Errored Events Indicates the total number of errored events in a bonding group (including bad sequence IDs, lost fragments, and lost frame starts and ends).

Tx Frames Indicates the total number of frames transmitted in a bonding group.

Tx Bytes Indicates the total number of bytes transmitted in a bonding group.



MX3112->PM->Bonding Group Stats->Group #1->Daily

Current 01/01 01/02 01/03 01/04 01/05 01/06 01/07

Rx Frames : 0 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

Rx Bytes : 0 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

Rx Errored Events : 0 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

Tx Frames : 0 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

Tx Bytes : 0 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a


6-202 61189901L1-1B


Quarter Hourly Performance MenuThe Quarter Hourly Performance menu (see Figure 6-147) provides statistics that are maintained for the current 15-minute interval and the completed 96 previous 15-minute intervals. Each option on the Quarter Hourly Performance menu displays a 24-hour history in 15 minute intervals (see Figure 6-148).

Figure 6-147. Quarter Hourly Performance Menu

Table 6-112 on page 202 provides definitions for the parameters used on Quarter Hourly Performance menu.




MX3112->PM->Bonding Group Stats->Group #1->Quarter Hourly

Current 14:15 14:00 13:45 13:30 13:15 13:00

1 - Rx Frames : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

2 - Rx Bytes : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

3 - Rx Errored Events : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

4 - Tx Frames : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

5 - Tx Bytes : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0




MX3112->PM->Bonding Group Stats->Group #1->Quarter Hourly->Rx Frames

14:30 0 10:15 0 06:00 0 01:45 0 21:30 0 17:15 0

14:15 0 10:00 0 05:45 0 01:30 0 21:15 0 17:00 0

14:00 0 09:45 0 05:30 0 01:15 0 21:00 0 16:45 0

13:45 0 09:30 0 05:15 0 01:00 0 20:45 0 16:30 0

13:30 0 09:15 0 05:00 0 00:45 0 20:30 0 16:15 0

13:15 0 09:00 0 04:45 0 00:30 0 20:15 0 16:00 0

13:00 0 08:45 0 04:30 0 00:15 0 20:00 0 15:45 0

12:45 0 08:30 0 04:15 0 00:00 0 19:45 0 15:30 0

12:30 0 08:15 0 04:00 0 23:45 0 19:30 0 15:15 0

12:15 0 08:00 0 03:45 0 23:30 0 19:15 0 15:00 n/a

12:00 0 07:45 0 03:30 0 23:15 0 19:00 0 14:45 n/a

11:45 0 07:30 0 03:15 0 23:00 0 18:45 0 14:30 n/a

11:30 0 07:15 0 03:00 0 22:45 0 18:30 0

11:15 0 07:00 0 02:45 0 22:30 0 18:15 0

11:00 0 06:45 0 02:30 0 22:15 0 18:00 0

10:45 0 06:30 0 02:15 0 22:00 0 17:45 0

10:30 0 06:15 0 02:00 0 21:45 0 17:30 0

61189901L1-1B 6-203


Thresholds MenuThe Thresholds menu (see Figure 6-149) is used to select the parameter then set the threshold to the desired level and enable or disable the alarm to be issued once the threshold is exceeded. Figure 6-149 is an example of the menu that is displayed for the Daily Thresholds menu and the Quarter Hourly Thresholds menu.

Figure 6-149. Thresholds Menu

The Thresholds menu options are shown in Table 6-113.

Table 6-113. Thresholds Menu Options


1–5 Bonding Group Parameters (refer to Table 6-112 on page 202 for definitions)


6 Reset ALL Bonding Group Thresholds to Defaults

This option resets all bonding group thresholds to the factory defaults.

7 Enable ALL Bonding Group Thresholds

This option enables all bonding group thresholds.

8 Disable ALL Bonding Group Thresholds

This option disables all bonding group thresholds.



MX3112->PM->Bonding Group Stats->Group #1->Daily Thrs

Threshold Alarm

1 - Rx Frames : 268435455 Disabled

2 - Rx Bytes : 268435455 Disabled

3 - Rx Error Events : 500 Disabled

4 - Tx Frames : 268435455 Disabled

5 - Tx Bytes : 268435455 Disabled

6 - Reset ALL Bonding Group Thresholds

7 - Enable ALL Bonding Group Thresholds

8 - Disable ALL Bonding Group Thresholds


6-204 61189901L1-1B


Threshold and Alarm MenuThe Threshold and Alarm menu (see Figure 6-150) is used to set the threshold to the desired level and enable or disable the alarm to be issued once the threshold is exceeded. Figure 6-150 is an example of the menu that is displayed for all of the bonding group parameters.









MX3112->PM->Bonding Group Stats->Group #1->Daily Thrs->Rx Frames

1 - Rx Frames Threshold : 268435455

2 - Rx Frames Alarm : Disabled


61189901L1-1B 6-205


Ethernet Stats MenuThe Ethernet Stats menu (see Figure 6-151) is used to view access the performance monitoring statistics for each Ethernet client port.

Figure 6-151. Ethernet Stats Menu

The Ethernet Stats menu options are shown in Table 6-115.

Table 6-115. Ethernet Stats Menu Options


1–4 Ethernet Port 1–4 This option displays the “Ethernet Port # Stats Menu” on page 6-207.

5 Reset ALL Ethernet Client Current Interval PM Data

This option resets current interval performance monitoring data for all Ethernet client ports.

6 Reset ALL Ethernet Client PM Data This option resets performance monitoring data for all Ethernet client ports.

7 Reset ALL Ethernet Client Thresholds

This option resets thresholds for all Ethernet client ports.

8 Enable ALL Ethernet Client Thresholds

This option enables thresholds for all Ethernet client ports.

9 Disable ALL Ethernet Client Thresholds

This option disables thresholds for all Ethernet client ports.



MX3112->PM->Ethernet Stats

1 - Ethernet Port 1

2 - Ethernet Port 2

3 - Ethernet Port 3

4 - Ethernet Port 4

5 - Reset ALL Ethernet Client Current Interval PM Data

6 - Reset ALL Ethernet Client PM Data

7 - Reset ALL Ethernet Client Thresholds

8 - Enable ALL Ethernet Client Thresholds

9 - Disable ALL Ethernet Client Thresholds


6-206 61189901L1-1B


Ethernet Port # Stats MenuThe Ethernet Port # Stats menu (see Figure 6-152) is used to view the performance monitoring statistics and set thresholds for each Ethernet client port.

Figure 6-152. Ethernet Port # Stats Menu

The Ethernet Port # Stats menu options are shown in Table 6-116.

Table 6-116. Ethernet Port # Stats Menu Options


1 Daily Performance This option displays the “Daily Performance Menu” on page 6-209.

2 Quarter Hourly Performance This option displays the “Quarter Hourly Performance Menu” on page 6-210.

3 Daily Thresholds This option displays the “Thresholds Menu” on page 6-211.

4 Quarter Hourly Thresholds This option displays the “Thresholds Menu” on page 6-211.

5 Reset Ethernet Port # Current Interval PM Data

This option resets current interval performance monitoring data for the selected Ethernet client port.

6 Reset Ethernet Port # PM Data This option resets performance monitoring data for the selected Ethernet client port.



MX3112->PM->Ethernet Stats->Port #1

1 - Daily Performance

2 - Quarter Hourly Performance

3 - Daily Thresholds

4 - Quarter Hourly Thresholds

5 - Reset Ethernet Port #1 Current Interval PM Data

6 - Reset Ethernet Port #1 PM Data


61189901L1-1B 6-207


Table 6-117 provides descriptions for the Ethernet parameters used in the sub-level menus and screens.

Table 6-117. Ethernet Parameter Descriptions

Parameter Description

Rx Packets Indicates the total number of packets (including bad packets) received.

Rx Octets Indicates the total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).

Rx CRC & Align Errors Indicates the total number of packets received that have a length (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) of between 64 and 1664 octets, inclusive, but had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).

Rx Undersize Packets Indicates the total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets long (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed.

Rx Oversize Packets Indicates the total number of packets received that were longer than 1664 octets (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed.

Rx Collisions Indicates the total number of collisions detected on this interface.

Tx Packets Indicates the total number of packets transmitted.

Tx Octets Indicates the total number of octets transmitted.

6-208 61189901L1-1B


Daily Performance MenuThe Daily Performance menu (see Figure 6-153) provides statistics that are maintained for the current 24-hour period and the seven previous days. Each option on the Daily Performance menu displays a detailed view of the daily statistics for the selected parameter as shown in Figure 6-154.

Figure 6-153. Daily Performance Menu

Table 6-117 on page 208 provides definitions for the parameters used on the Daily Perfor-mance menu.

Figure 6-154. Detailed Daily Performance Screen



MX3112->PM->Ethernet Stats->Port #1->Daily

Current 12/31 12/30 12/29 12/28 12/27 12/26

1 - Rx Packets : 0 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

2 - Rx Octets : 0 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

3 - Rx CRC & Align Errors : 0 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

4 - Rx Undersize Packets : 0 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

5 - Rx Oversize Packets : 0 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

6 - Rx Collisions : 0 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

7 - Tx Packets : 0 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

8 - Tx Octets : 0 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a




MX3112->PM->Ethernet Stats->Port #1->Daily->Detailed

Rx Packets

Current : 0

12/31 : n/a

12/30 : n/a

12/29 : n/a

12/28 : n/a

12/27 : n/a

12/26 : n/a

12/25 : n/a


61189901L1-1B 6-209


Quarter Hourly Performance MenuThe Quarter Hourly Performance menu (see Figure 6-155) provides statistics that are maintained for the current 15-minute interval and the completed 96 previous 15-minute intervals. Each option on the Quarter Hourly Performance menu displays a 24-hour history in 15 minute intervals (see Figure 6-156).

Figure 6-155. Quarter Hourly Performance Menu

Table 6-117 on page 208 provides definitions for the parameters used on the Quarter Hourly Performance menu.




MX3112->PM->Ethernet Stats->Port #1->Quarter Hourly

Current 16:00 15:45 15:30 15:15 15:00 14:45

1 - Rx Packets : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

2 - Rx Octets : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

3 - Rx CRC & Align Errors : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

4 - Rx Undersize Packets : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

5 - Rx Oversize Packets : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

6 - Rx Collisions : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

7 - Tx Packets : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

8 - Tx Octets : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0




MX3112->PM->Ethernet Stats->Port #1->Quarter Hourly->Rx Octets

15:00 0 10:45 0 06:30 0 02:15 0 22:00 0 17:45 0

14:45 0 10:30 0 06:15 0 02:00 0 21:45 0 17:30 0

14:30 0 10:15 0 06:00 0 01:45 0 21:30 0 17:15 0

14:15 0 10:00 0 05:45 0 01:30 0 21:15 0 17:00 0

14:00 0 09:45 0 05:30 0 01:15 0 21:00 0 16:45 0

13:45 0 09:30 0 05:15 0 01:00 0 20:45 0 16:30 0

13:30 0 09:15 0 05:00 0 00:45 0 20:30 0 16:15 0

13:15 0 09:00 0 04:45 0 00:30 0 20:15 0 16:00 0

13:00 0 08:45 0 04:30 0 00:15 0 20:00 0 15:45 0

12:45 0 08:30 0 04:15 0 00:00 0 19:45 0 15:30 0

12:30 0 08:15 0 04:00 0 23:45 0 19:30 0 15:15 0

12:15 0 08:00 0 03:45 0 23:30 0 19:15 0 15:00 n/a

12:00 0 07:45 0 03:30 0 23:15 0 19:00 0

11:45 0 07:30 0 03:15 0 23:00 0 18:45 0

11:30 0 07:15 0 03:00 0 22:45 0 18:30 0

11:15 0 07:00 0 02:45 0 22:30 0 18:15 0

11:00 0 06:45 0 02:30 0 22:15 0 18:00 0

6-210 61189901L1-1B


Thresholds MenuThe Thresholds menu (see Figure 6-157) is used to select the parameter then set the threshold to the desired level and enable or disable the alarm to be issued once the threshold is exceeded. Figure 6-157 is an example of the menu that is displayed for the Daily Thresholds menu and the Quarter Hourly Thresholds menu.

Figure 6-157. Thresholds Menu

The Thresholds menu options are shown in Table 6-118.

Table 6-118. Thresholds Menu Options


1–7 Ethernet Parameters (refer to Table 6-117 on page 208 for definitions)


6 Reset Thresholds to Defaults for selected Port

This option resets thresholds to the factory defaults for the selected port.

7 Enable Thresholds for selected Port This option enables thresholds for the selected port.

8 Disable Thresholds for selected Port This option disables thresholds for the selected port.



MX3112->PM->Ethernet Stats->Port #1->Daily Thrs

Threshold Alarm

1 - Rx Packets : 268435455 Disabled

2 - Rx Octets : 268435455 Disabled

3 - CRC & Align Errors : 500 Disabled

4 - Undersize Packets : 268435455 Disabled

5 - Oversize Packets : 268435455 Disabled

6 - Collisions : 268435455 Disabled

7 - Tx Packets : 268435455 Disabled

8 - Tx Octets : 268435455 Disabled

9 - Reset Thresholds to Defaults for selected Port

10 - Enable Thresholds for selected Port

11 - Disable Thresholds for selected Port


61189901L1-1B 6-211


Threshold and Alarm MenuThe Threshold and Alarm menu (see Figure 6-158) is used to set the threshold to the desired level and enable or disable the alarm to be issued once the threshold is exceeded. Figure 6-158 is an example of the menu that is displayed for all of the Ethernet parameters.









MX3112->PM->Ethernet Stats->Port #1->Daily Thrs->Rx Octets

1 - Rx Octets Threshold : 10

2 - Rx Octets Alarm : Disabled


6-212 61189901L1-1B


System Alarms MenuThe System Alarms menu (see Figure 6-159) provides options for viewing all alarms affecting MX3112 system operations. View all alarms within the Master Log screen. The Environmental Alarms menu contains user-provisionable options. The Alarm Chronology menu offers the viewing of alarms in either ascending or descending order.

Figure 6-159. System Alarms Menu

The System Alarms menu options are shown in Table 6-120.

Table 6-120. System Alarms Menu Options


1 Master Log This option displays the “Master Alarms Log Screen” on page 6-214.

2 Controller A This option displays the “Controller Alarms Log Screen” on page 6-216.

Controller B This option displays the “Controller Alarms Log Screen” on page 6-216 when Controller B is installed.

4 User-Definable Alarms This option displays the “User-Definable Alarms Menu” on page 6-218.

5 Alarm Chronology : Ascending This option is used to select the alarm chronology. Options are as follows:

• Ascending• Descending



MX3112->System Alarms

1 - Master Log

2 - Controller A

Controller B

4 - User-Definable Alarms

5 - Alarm Chronology : Ascending


61189901L1-1B 6-213


Master Alarms Log ScreenThe Master Alarms Log screen (see Figure 6-160) is used to review and acknowledge all system alarms.

Figure 6-160. Master Alarms Log Screen

The Master Alarms Log screen fields are shown in Table 6-121.

Table 6-121. Master Alarms Log Screen Fields

Field Description

Date This field displays the date that the alarm was initiated.

Time This field displays the time that the alarm was initiated.

Pos This field displays the position (source) of the alarm. Possible sources are as follows:

• CA = Controller A• CB = Controller B• MA = Module A• MB = Module B

Type This field displays the type of the card that originates the alarm. Possible types are as follows:

• Controller• Module

Port This field displays the port/interface associated with the alarm.



Alarm Log - Master Alarms Alarms 1 to 13 of 13 Page 1 of 1

Date Time Pos Type Port Level Description Status

07/08/05 16:46:58 CA Controller ENV Major PWR B FAIL *Active

07/08/05 16:47:03 CA Controller DS1 PORT #1 Major DS1 LOS *Active












---------------------------->>> END OF ALARM LOG <<<----------------------------

Inverse = Active * = Unacknowledged Chronology = Ascending

(N)ext (P)rev (F)irst (L)ast (C)lear (A)cknowledge (S)elect Log

6-214 61189901L1-1B


The Master Alarms Log screen hot keys are shown in Table 6-122.

Level This field displays the severity level of the alarm. Possible states are as follows:

• Info• Alert• Minor• Major• Critical

Description This field displays a brief description of the alarm.

Status This field displays the status of the alarm. Possible states are as follows:

• Active• Clear• Event

An asterik (*) is displayed beside the status if the alarm is unacknowledged.

Table 6-122. Master Alarms Log Screen Hot Keys


N Next This hot key displays the next page of alarms.

P Previous This hot key displays the previous page of alarms.

F First This hot key displays the first page of alarms.

L Last This hot key displays the last page of alarms.

C Clear This hot key clears all acknowledged alarms.

A Acknowledge This hot key acknowledges all alarms.

S Select Log This hot key provides access a specific alarm log. Options are as follows:

• M = Master• C = Controller

Table 6-121. Master Alarms Log Screen Fields (Continued)

Field Description

61189901L1-1B 6-215


Controller Alarms Log ScreenThe Controller Alarms Log screen (see Figure 6-161) is used to review and acknowledge controller card alarms.

Figure 6-161. Controller Alarms Log Screen

The Controller Alarms Log screen fields are shown in Table 6-123.

Table 6-123. Controller Alarms Log Screen Fields

Field Description

Date This field displays the date that the alarm was initiated.

Time This field displays the time that the alarm was initiated.

Pos This field displays the position (source) of the alarm. Possible sources are as follows:

• CA = Controller A• CB = Controller B• MA = Module A• MB = Module B

Type This field displays the type of the card that originates the alarm. Possible types are as follows:

• Controller• Module

Port This field displays the port/interface associated with the alarm.



Alarm Log - Controller Alarms Alarms 1 to 14 of 21 Page 1 of

Date Time Pos Type Port Level Description Status

07/08/05 16:46:58 CA Controller ENV Major PWR B FAIL *Active













---------------------------->>> END OF ALARM LOG <<<----------------------------

Inverse = Active * = Unacknowledged Chronology = Ascending

(N)ext (P)rev (F)irst (L)ast (C)lear (A)cknowledge (S)elect Log

6-216 61189901L1-1B


The Controller Alarms Log screen hot keys are shown in Table 6-124.

Level This field displays the severity level of the alarm. Possible states are as follows:

• Info• Alert• Minor• Major• Critical

Description This field displays a brief description of the alarm.

Status This field displays the status of the alarm. Possible states are as follows:

• Active• Clear• Event

An asterik (*) is displayed beside the status if the alarm is unacknowledged.

Table 6-124. Controller Alarms Log Screen Hot Keys


N Next This hot key displays the next page of alarms.

P Previous This hot key displays the previous page of alarms.

F First This hot key displays the first page of alarms.

L Last This hot key displays the last page of alarms.

C Clear This hot key clears all acknowledged alarms.

A Acknowledge This hot key acknowledges all alarms.

S Select Log This hot key provides access a specific alarm log. Options are as follows:

• M = Master• C = Controller

Table 6-123. Controller Alarms Log Screen Fields (Continued)

Field Description

61189901L1-1B 6-217


User-Definable Alarms MenuThe User-Definable Alarms menu (see Figure 6-162) allows access to environmental and stand-by controller alarms.

Figure 6-162. User-Definable Alarms Menu

The User-Definable Alarms menu options are shown in Table 6-125.

Table 6-125. User-Definable Alarms Menu Options


1 Environmental Alarms This option displays the “Environmental Alarms Menu” on page 6-219.

2 Stand-by Controller Removed Level This option displays the severity of the alarm gener-ated if the stand-by controller card is removed. Options are as follows:

• Disabled: Alarm is suppressed.• Info• Alert• Minor• Major• Critical



MX3112->System Alarms->User-Definable Alarms

1 - Environmental Alarms

2 - Stand-by Controller Removed Level : Minor


6-218 61189901L1-1B


Environmental Alarms MenuThe Environmental Alarms menu (see Figure 6-163) provides access to the auxiliary input and power feed alarms.

Figure 6-163. Environmental Alarms Menu

The Environmental Alarms menu options are shown in Table 6-126.

Table 6-126. Environmental Alarms Menu Options


1–4 Aux 1–4 Input This option displays the “Auxiliary Input Menu” on page 6-220.

5–6 PWR Bus A–B Input This option displays the “Power Menu” on page 6-221.



MX3112->System Alarms->User-Definable Alarms->Environmental Alarms

Source Description Level

1 - Aux #1 Input AUX #1 INPUT Major




5 - PWR Bus A Input PWR A FAIL Major

6 - PWR Bus B Input PWR B FAIL Major


61189901L1-1B 6-219


Auxiliary Input MenuThe Auxiliary Input menu (see Figure 6-164) is used to input the description of the selected auxiliary input and set the alarm severity level.

Figure 6-164. Auxiliary Input Menu

The Auxiliary Input menu options are shown in Table 6-127.

Table 6-127. Auxiliary Input Menu Options


1 AUX Input Description This option is used to enter a 16-character, auxiliary input description.

2 AUX Input Level This option is used to set the alarm severity level of the selected auxiliary input. Options are as follows:

• Disabled: Alarm is suppressed.• Info• Alert• Minor• Major• Critical• ACO. The input serves as an ACO input.



MX3112->System Alarms->User-Definable Alarms->Environmental Alarms->Aux

1 - AUX #1 Input Description : AUX #1 INPUT

2 - AUX #1 Input Level : Major


6-220 61189901L1-1B


Power MenuThe Power menu (see Figure 6-165) is used to set the alarm severity level for the selected power bus input.

Figure 6-165. Power Menu

The Power menu options are shown in Table 6-128.

Table 6-128. Power Menu Options


1 PWR FAIL Level This option is used to set the alarm severity level of the selected power bus input. Options are as follows:

• Disabled. Alarm is suppressed.• Info• Alert• Minor• Major• Critical



MX3112->System Alarms->User-Definable Alarms->Environmental Alarms->Power

1 - PWR A FAIL Level : Major


61189901L1-1B 6-221


Remote Management Menu (DS1 Mode Only)The Remote Management menu (Figure 6-166) provides menu access to a remote (RT) MX3112 system from a local system. The Remote Management menu is available on an MX3112 system that is operating in COT mode. If connected to one or more remote MX3112 systems at the far end of one or more bonding groups, the Remote Management menu lists the remote systems by their system ID as shown in Figure 6-166.

The Remote Management menu traffic between the COT and the RT systems is carried by one of the bonding groups as in-band traffic. The COT and RT systems communicate with each other to designate one of the bonding groups to carry this management traffic. This communi-cation is performed via a proprietary messaging system over DS1 FDL channels. The bonding group used for carrying this menu traffic is automatically selected according to the available bandwidth compared with other bonding groups. The menu traffic can automatically shift to another bonding group in the event of bandwidth impairments.

Figure 6-166. Remote Management Menu

The Remote Management menu options are shown in Table 6-129.

Table 6-129. Remote Management Menu Options


1 MX3112 REMOTE This option gives access to the log-on screen for the remote MX3112 system. All screens are the same as the screens for the local MX3112 system.



MX3112->Remote Menu Access

1 - MX3112 REMOTE [Critical]


6-222 61189901L1-1B


Firmware Upgrade MenuThe Firmware Upgrade menu (Figure 6-167) provides access to upgrade the firmware for both controllers and both expansion modules. For additional information on firmware upgrades, refer to “Firmware Upgrade Procedures” on page 7-2.

Figure 6-167. Firmware Upgrade Menu

The Firmware Upgrade menu options are shown in Table 6-130.

Table 6-130. Firmware Upgrade Menu Options


C MX3112 This option displays the “Method Menu” on page 6-224.



MX3112->Firmware Upgrade

C MX3112........ - A [D01]

.............. - B []


61189901L1-1B 6-223


Method MenuThe Method menu (Figure 6-168) provides options for upgrading the MX3112 firmware.

CAUTIONResetting this card disrupts traffic and causes a switch to the standby card if it is installed.

Figure 6-168. Method Menu

The Method menu options are shown in Table 6-131.

The Method menu fields are shown in Table 6-132.

Table 6-131. Method Menu Options


1 Y-Modem This option is used to transfer the new application software to the unit via YModem.

2 TFTP This option displays the “TFTP Update Menu” on page 6-225.

3 Reset Active Controller This option resets the active controller card. Reset-ting the active controller card switches operation to the standby card. In a redundant system, the standby card updates and automatically resets.



MX3112->Firmware Upgrade->Method

1 - Y-Modem

2 - TFTP

3 - Reset Active Controller (A)

Controller A status: Ready for transfer

Controller B status: Not available


6-224 61189901L1-1B


TFTP Update MenuThe TFTP Update menu (Figure 6-169) is used to download code stored from a computer to the MX3112 through a TFTP server.

Figure 6-169. TFTP Update Menu

The TFTP Update menu options are shown in Table 6-133.

Table 6-132. Method Menu Fields

Field Description

Controller A - B status This field displays the progress of the TFTP download for the controller. Progress messages are as follows:

• Ready for transfer• Not available• Transfer in progress

Table 6-133. TFTP Update Menu Options


1 TFTP Server This option is used to enter the IP address of the TFTP server hosting the application software file.

2 Remote Filename This option is used to enter the path and filename of the application software file on the TFTP server.

3 Initiate Transfer This option displays the “TFTP Update Status Screen” on page 6-226.



MX3112->Firmware Upgrade->Method->TFTP Update

1 - TFTP Server : 172.22.146.57

2 - Remote Filename : mx3112/softwareD01.bin

3 - Initiate Transfer


61189901L1-1B 6-225


TFTP Update Status ScreenThe TFTP Update Status screen (Figure 6-170) displays the status of the TFTP connection.

Figure 6-170. TFTP Update Status Screen

The TFTP Update Status screen options are shown in Table 6-134.

Table 6-134. TFTP Update Status Screen Options

Field Description

TFTP Server This field displays the IP address of the TFTP server. The TFTP IP address must be configured prior to attempting a TFTP download.

Remote Filename This field displays the TFTP filename that is used to upgrade the controller.

TFTP Status This field displays the progress of the TFTP download. Table 6-135 describes the TFTP download progress messages.

Controller A - B status This field displays the progress of the TFTP download for the Controller A. Progress messages are as follows:

• Ready for transfer• Not available• Transfer in progress



MX3112->Firmware Upgrade->Method->TFTP Update->Status

TFTP Server : 172.22.146.57

Remote Filename : mx3112/ao1.bin

TFTP Status : Contacting Server -

Controller A status: Transfer in progress



6-226 61189901L1-1B


The TFTP Update Status screen hot key is shown in Table 6-136.

LogoutSelection of the Logout menu item results in an immediate exit from the program, no further menus, screens, or confirmation dialog boxes are presented.

Table 6-135. TFTP Download Progress Messages

Progress Message Description

Contacting Server This message indicates that an attempt to establish communication with the TFTP network server specified by the server address in the TFTP Server IP Address field is in progress.

Timed Out This message indicates that communication with the TFTP network server is lost.

Beginning TFTP Transfer This message indicates that communication with the TFTP network server is established and the update file is being transferred between the TFTP network server and the MX3112 system.

Completed This message indicates that the MX3112 system successfully received the update file.

File Not Found This message indicates that the TFTP network server is unable to locate the specified file name or path in the Remote Filename field.

Access Violation This status indicates that the TFTP network server denied the MX3112 system access to the given update filename and path. Please verify appropriate user rights are selected for the specified path.

Table 6-136. TFTP Update Status Screen Hot Key

Hot Key Description Function

C Cancel TFTP Transfer This option cancels the TFTP transfer.

61189901L1-1B 6-227



6-228 61189901L1-1B

Section 7Maintenance

INTRODUCTIONThe MX3 chassis and MX3112 Controller Card do not require routine maintenance for normal operation. However, the MX3 Fan Module does require routine maintenance as described in the “MX3 Fan Module Maintenance” section. Firmware upgrade procedures are also provided.

Do not attempt to make repairs in the field. Repair services can be obtained by returning the defective unit to ADTRAN. For warranty information, refer to “Appendix A, Warranty”.

MX3 FAN MODULE MAINTENANCEReplacement filters (P/N 1189009L1) are available and can be ordered separately. This is a plug-in assembly and can be replaced without powering down the chassis.

Minimal routine maintenance of the MX3 Fan Module is required. The filter should be inspected for excessive dust at least every 90 days and replaced as needed.

To replace the filter, complete the following steps:

1. Using a flat or phillips-head screwdriver, loosen the screw on the left side of the front panel of the MX3 Fan Module.

2. Remove the MX3 Fan Module, taking care not to disturb the filter.

3. Remove the old filter, taking care not to allow dust from the filter to enter the system.

4. Install a new filter.

5. Install the MX3 Fan Module back into the MX3 chassis.

6. Tighten the screw to secure the MX3 Fan Module to the MX3 chassis.

61189901L1-1B 7-1


FIRMWARE UPGRADE PROCEDURESThe MX3112 supports firmware transfers via Y-modem (craft or Telnet menu sessions), TFTP transfer, and controller-to-controller transfer.

Upgrading a Redundant SystemWhen upgrading a redundant system via Y-modem or TFTP transfer (see Figure 7-1), the procedure is as follows:

1. Initiate the transfer from the active controller.

2. The transfer begins to both the active and stand-by controllers simultaneously.

3. When the file is received, it is verified for integrity and compatibility with the hardware.

4. The stand-by controller proceeds to program the new firmware, and then reboots automatically.

5. When the active controller detects a successful reboot of the stand-by controller, the active controller proceeds to program the new firmware.

6. The user is then requested to manually reboot the active controller.

7. When initiating the reboot of the active controller, a protection switch takes place to the stand-by controller and the active controller reboots.

Figure 7-1. Firmware Upgrade Method Menu

During critical phases of the upgrade procedure, the ACT LED on the front panel becomes solid amber. It is very important for the system to remain undisturbed during this process. Removing a controller during a critical phase of this process can corrupt the firmware that resides on the controller.




1 - Y-Modem

2 - TFTP


Controller A status: Successful. Manually reset active controller.



7-2 61189901L1-1B

Section 7, Maintenance - Firmware Upgrade Procedures

Controller-to-Controller TransferIf two controllers are operating redundantly, and one controller has a newer version than the other, initiate a direct firmware transfer of the newer firmware from one controller to the other, regardless of which is active. Options become available on the menu as shown below in Figure 7-2 and Figure 7-3.

Figure 7-2. Firmware Upgrade Menu

Figure 7-3. Method Menu



MX3112->Firmware Upgrade

C MX3112........ - A [A03]

MX3112........ - B [A02]





1 - Y-Modem

2 - TFTP


4 - Upgrade controller B to version A03

Controller A status: Ready for transfer

Controller B status: Ready for transfer

Note: When transferring via Y-modem or TFTP, the standby

controller will update before the active controller.


61189901L1-1B 7-3



7-4 61189901L1-1B

Appendix AWarranty

WARRANTY AND CUSTOMER SERVICEADTRAN will replace or repair this product within the warranty period if it does not meet the published specifications or fails while in service. Warranty information can be found at www.adtran.com/warranty.

Refer to the following subsections for sales, support, Customer and Product Service (CAPS) requests, or further information.

ADTRAN SalesPricing/Availability:

800-827-0807

ADTRAN Technical SupportPre-Sales Applications/Post-Sales Technical Assistance:

800-726-8663

Standard hours: Monday - Friday, 7 a.m. - 7 p.m. CST Emergency hours: 7 days/week, 24 hours/day

ADTRAN Repair/CAPSReturn for Repair/Upgrade:

(256) 963-8722

Repair and Return AddressContact CAPS prior to returning equipment to ADTRAN.

ADTRAN, Inc. CAPS Department 901 Explorer Boulevard Huntsville, Alabama 35806-2807

61189901L1-1B A-1

http://www.adtran.com/warranty

Carrier Networks Division901 Explorer Blvd.

Huntsville, AL 35806

®

MX3112 System Manual

Documents

Transcript of MX3112 System Manual